Home

Service Manual: Stella-C4, S-C4 (D067/D068/D069/D072), Aficio

1. DOMMES or alo se These bits set the initial starting modem rate for fe pansion 14 4k Use dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers 0 3 16 8 1 rg rr 168k If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 19 2k protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference 21 6k V 8 protocol on off G3 switch O3 bit2 app pa ap p a 11 Other settings Not used Initial modem type for 9 6 k or 7 2 kbps Bit 5 O Bit 4 0 V 29 These bits setthe initial modem type for 9 6 and 7 2 kbps Bit 5 O Bit 4 1 2 V 17 if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds Bit 5 1 Bit 4 O V 34 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 Reserved Bree hah a G3 Switch 06 SP No 1 105 007 DEN GNE NN 274 ie do Bit Switches Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 Bit O e LEE oe ESEJ EE EN E2 EI These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch O3 bit2 AKA EC ws E E E EI 2 29 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Modem types available for reception vEw _ The setting of these bits is u
2. 822 When the main switch is turned on or starting the self diagnostic the HDD stays busy for the specified time or more Defective HDD Defective controller Check that the HDD is correctly 3004 C Command error connected to the controller Replace the HDD Replace the controller 823 SekdegnosicEtotNIB Self diagnostie Error NIB Error NIB MAC address check sum error 6101 C The result of the MAC address check Defective controller sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM 1 Replace the controller 38 SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 PHY IC error ii The PHY IC on the control i E on cal roller canno Same as C823 6101 be correctly recognized PHY IC loop back error 6105 An error occurred during the loop back test for the PHY IC on the Same as SC823 6101 controller loose connection Defective standard NVRAM The controller cannot recognize the Defective controller standard NVRAM installed or detects Check the standard NVRAM is firmly that the NVRAM is defective inserted into the socket Replace the NVRAM Replace the controller Self diagnostic Error RTC Optional 1501 Clock error An RTC device is recognized and the difference between the RTC device and the CPU exceeds the defined limit 1 Replace the RTC device RTC defective No RTC device is recognized 15FF RTC not detected e NVRAM without RTC installed Bac
3. b872r108a 1 Open the DF left cover DF front cover A P x 1 Bracket B P im x 1 DF feed clutch 82 x 1 KR O N 148 Adjusting Copy Image Area Adjusting Copy Image Area Adjust the copy image area under any of the following conditions 1 After clearing engine data SP5 801 002 or SP5 998 001 2 After replacing any of the following components First scanner or second scanner Lens block e Scanner motor e Polygon mirror motor Papertray Printing Make sure that the paper is correctly loaded in each paper tray before starting the adjustment procedures in this section Adjusting Registration Use the Trimming Area Pattern SP5 902 001 10 for this adjustment 1 Print out the test pattern with the paper fed from the regular paper tray 2 Print out the test pattern with the paper fed from the by pass tray 3 Print out the test pattern by selecting duplex printing B Y A lt b130r935 4 Measure the distance between the leading edge of the image area and the leading edge of the paper A e The diagram shows the paper on the copy tray Note that the paper is output with the face down 149 4 Replacement and Adjustment O s SP 001 001 Al Tay 5001 003 ule 5 Adjust the leading edge registration SP1 001 6 Measure the distance between the side edge of the image area and the side edge of the paper B E SPL002002 ndr 5 002
4. 10681005 7 Attach the ground plate 8 Secure the USB2 0 SD Slot B with the upper left cover as shown above P x 1 M3 x 6 blue P x 2 x 8 959 2 Installation d068i006 9 Make a clamp hole the upper left cover with a screwdriver as shown above e Smooth the hole in the upper left cover dO68iD07 10 Attach the upper left cover A to the mainframe 11 Attach the rear cover d068i008 12 Attach the cable clamp A to the upper left cover P x 1 as shown above 60 USB 2 0 5D Slot Type B d068i009 13 Connect the USB cable A to USB A 14 Attach the interface cover 15 Plug in and turn on the main machine 16 Enter the SP mode and then change the setting of SP1013 001 from O to 1 d027i118 17 Attach the decal A to the USB2 0 SD Slot as shown above When Installing the Handset 1 Do steps 1 to 8 in installation procedure 61 2 Installation 90681010 2 Make two holes upper left cover with screwdriver as shown above e Smooth the holes in the upper left cover d068i011 3 Attach the handset bracket A F x 2 4 Attach the cradle B to the handset bracket P x 2 62 USB 2 0 5D Slot Type B d068i013 5 Set the handset on the handset bracket 6 Connect the handset cable to the TEL jack and set the telephone cable A as shown above 7 Do steps 13 to 17 in installation procedure Testing the SD Card USB
5. ID Sensor and Duplex Roller sse RN T TOTO ICU and Controller Board ce ee Controller Board F SPF models D068 D069 Other Replabemielils ser trn been entire lena i a ent eei Duplex Motor nnne High Voltage Power Supply Board Contact Release Solenoid sss Tener Supply cisterna ttt erected rentes ton FCU For D068 D0469 ennn aser IB RR Location ol the Caution Decal Laser oT LD Unit and Polygon Mirror Motor sse RDI 00000009000000909900000009000000900000000909000009090000000909000009000000000000000900000009000000000000000000000099 bdo T Original Feed Separahon ROMS eese isset pice treu coegerit pini pd SN Md epu Origina
6. operate even though it is executed on 1 Replace the controller board purpose 060A O60E Detailed error code Defective CPU devices Defective ASIC devices Cut in command does not operate when it is executed 1 Replace the controller board 0610 Detailed error code Timer cut in does not operate even Defective CPU devices though it is set 1 Replace the controller board 0612 Detailed error code e Defective ASIC e Defective devices in which ASIC detects cut in Cut in in ASIC occurs 1 Replace the controller board Defective CPU devices The pipeline clock frequency rate is Mode bit data error which is used for different from the prescribed value initializing CPU Replace the controller board 36 SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 0702 Detailed error code Insufficient CPU cache The result when the program is Insufficient memory process speed executed in the command cache is different from desirable value controle rog 2 Replace the RAM DIMM 0709 070 Detailed error code Defective CPU devices Even you write the data in the only Incorrect SPD cache of memory the data is actually MOM Boot mode setting error written in another area not cache of memory 1 Replace the controller board 2 Replace the RAM DIMM 0801 0804 0807 0808 0809 80A Detailed error code An error occurs when checking the Defective CPU
7. 221 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 e Occurs only during manual reception Transmission 15 13 Receive Buffer Full cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan to Email 15 14 Mail Header Format Error The mail doin ner sangere format For example the Date line description is incorrect e The e mail is notin standard format There is no 15 15 Mail Divide Error boundary between parts of the e mail including the header 15 16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large MEN May occur during manual receiving only because the 15 17 Receive Timeout network is not operating correctly 15 18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received 15 31 Final Destination for Transfer The format of the final destination for the transfer Request Reception Format Error request was incorrect The transmission cannot be delivered to the final destination 15 39 Send Delivery Destination Destination file format is incorrect Error Could not create the destination for the file transmission Recepti ject the t fi 15 41 SMTP Receive Error Seepran Because ion exceeded the limit for the Auth E mail RX setting The delivery destination address was specified with 15 42 OffR Gat E a Off Ramp Gateway OFF 15 43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
8. 83 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 5120 ICkForCuRemove For Cut ICkForCuRemove O7 Yes 1 Standby only 2 No Specifies the condition to reset the copy job settings when the key counter is removed Yes The settings are cleared when the counter is removed 5120 1 e 1 StdBy Standby only The settings are cleared when the counter is removed at the end of a job e 2 No The settings are not cleared under either condition As for duplex copying the job settings are always preserved regardless of these setting 5121 Counter Up Timing 0 Feed In 1 Exit Selects the count up timing 5121 Feed At each paper feed e 1 Exit At each paper exit Fax Prnt Cnt Off Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device 00r1 0 Fax Prnt Cnt Off O Automatic printing 1 No automatic printing CE Login 5169 If you change the printer bit switches you must log in to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode Dor1 0 001 CE Login Disabled 1 Enabled 5188 Copy NV Version Copy NV Version ES Displays the NVRAM version in the controller board 84 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Adjusts the RTC real time clock time setting for the local time zone 5302 Examples For Japan 9 GMT enter 540 9 hours x 60 min DOM 540 Tok
9. EE 166 Upload eme eS aM 166 Firmware Update Procedure 167 Tesi Palerm 172 POSTION ens mutua 175 Machine No Setting SP5 81 1 001 sss nentes 176 duelguikdn E 177 D Sensor Error Analysis 177 Using SP Mode Basie DOG7 7 DO 2 oseere onin reri me ieu S yeast eU rte Ee EE E 179 Data Upload Download SP5 824 825 sse 179 Firmware Update PrOCedUle essei tres Reo eina pest beens ea raton s tsasoa enkes osn EEEE rosana 180 Test allem Punb5P5002s00 I 181 184 Serial Number Input 184 185 ID S nsorEmor Analysis 186 Fax Service Tables Only For D0687 0069 188 10 1 Product Information Specifications See Appendices for the following information 1 Product Information Machine Configuration Mainframe Basic D067 D072 t b262v906c Standard Component Machine Code a Optional Components Machine Code Standard Optional Component Machine Code
10. The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update he certification update failed and the GW URLis being notified of the failed update The period of the certification has expired and a new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the 067 certification update request successfully and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW URL The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller and the certification is being stored The certification has been stored and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event The storing of the certification has failed and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event The certification update request has been received from the GW URL the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed but a certification error has been received and the rescue certification is being recorded The rescue certification of No 17 has been recorded and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update The notification of the request for certification update has been co
11. 00000000 d068t104 Press the Return button several times to exit SP Mode 10 11 Press the E button Use the arrow key and select Printer Features User Tools Fax Features Printer features d045t105 Use the arrow key and select List Test Print Print Features List Test Print Maintenance system d045t106 Use the arrow key and select Cardsave ADD or Cardsave New Card Save Function List Test Prnt Cardsave ADD Cardsave New d045t107 14 To enable the newly configured settings select switch button and then press the Return button to exit the List Test Print menu 15 Send a job to the printer 16 As soon as the printer receives the data it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print output Nothing is displayed on the screen indicating that a Card Save operation was successful 17 Press the Return button to exit Card Save mode 18 Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000 19 Remove the SD card after main power switch is turned off Error Messages Card Save error messages Init error A card save process i e card detection change to kernel mode failed to initialize Card not found Card cannot be detected in the slot No memory Insufficient working memory to process the job Write error Failed to write to the card Other error An unknown error occurred IF an error occurs pressing OK wil
12. 1 step System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server 091 FTP Auth Port Setting address book that is used in the identification mode 0 to 65535 3671 1 step 094 Encryption Stat Shows status of the encryption function for the address book data Note 1 SP5846 062 to SP5846 065 do not normally require adjustment These SP modes are enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book 5848 SP5848 1 sets the 4 bit switch assignment for the access control setting Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router ac Access Control 002 Ac Repo only Lower 4 Bits ac UD only Lower 4 bits ac For Cherry only Lower 4 bits Switches access control on and off 0000 No access control ac Log Fax Lower 4 bits 0001 Denies access to DeskTop Binder ac Job Ctrl Lower 4 bits ac Dev Mng Lower 4 bits ac Uadmin Lower Abits 000 Max Size DL Image to 1024 1 K 002 005 007 011 022 100 123 124 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables wwe ioni Log Type Access Displays the log server settings 213 Primary Srv These can be adjusted with the Web Image Monitor Secondary Srv Specifies the transmit interval to 1 Th t 216 Interval Time A a Sep This SP is activated only when SP5848 217 is setto 2 Transmit periodically Sele
13. Defective NVRAM Loose connection between the BICU An error occurs during engine NVRAM and the NVRAM check Incorrect installation of the NVRAM Defective BICU NVRAM error 98 Localization setting not specified The main power switch is turned on for the The localization information in the first time after the NVRAM is nonvolatile ROM and in the NVRAM is replaced different SP5 807 001 Incorrect localization setting Defective NVRAM 982 4 Appendix Electrical Component Defects Electrical Component Defects Sensor Switch aa Registration Sensor Paper jam CN129 Paper End Sensor Load paper Bypass Paper End None The machine cannot detect paper on one Sensor the bypass tray CN128 Paper Path Sensor Paper jam SN Density ID mage Densit Print quality may become worse Sensor TTN The connector is shared with the Toner Density TD mechanical total counter Sensor Scanner HP Sensor 959 60 4 Appendix Electrical Component Defects Platen Cover Sensor The copier does not warm up when SN None you open the platen cover Dude Open PFCNIOS Perm e ON oo NE e DF Registration Paper jam ensor Originals are correctly transported COn Ens Inverter Sensor CN114 Right door open Front Doar Switch The message depends on which 5 Front Right door open circuit is open white front blue right CNI 14 Right doo
14. Error notification reports Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam LSize PrtPGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3 DLT and larger n addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine This SP counts the amount of paper front back counted as 1 page used for duplex printing Prints Duplex Last pages printed only on one side are not counted 0 to 99999999 0 1 T PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing This is the total for all applications C PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combining and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application F PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combining and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application 148 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 P PrtPGS Dup Comb 99999999 0 1 8 424 These SPs count by binding and combining and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application S PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 425 These SPs count by binding and combining and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the scanner app
15. Input voltage North America 110 120V 60Hz 8A Europe 220 240 V 50 60Hz AA Image quality guaranteed at rated voltage 10 Operation guaranteed at rated voltage 1576 Copier Copier Accessory Check Basic Model 0067 0072 pene err Paper Size Decal 15 27 Fax Model 0068 Printer Scanner and Fax Model 0069 NECR 17 EU Safety Sheet 27 Paper Size Decal 17 27 29 Operating Instructions Book 17 27 29 Operating Instructions CD ROM 17 27 29 Handset Bracket 17 Screw for Handset Bracket 17 Modular Cable 17 Operating Instructions Book Fax 17 27 29 29 2 Installation Connecter Cover for TEL 17 Ferrite Core for TEL Line Ferrite Core 17 27 29 meam Caution Decal 17 27 29 Installation Procedure ANCAUTION Make sure that the copier remains unplugged during installation b262i901a 1 Remove the all strips of tape 2 Remove the bag A SMC and A3 sheet of paper on the exposure glass 30 CON O C Copier b262i902a D 62621106 Remove the three scanner lock pins tag is hanging from each pin To remove Grasp the base of the pin C turn the pin 90 degrees and pull it down and out Remove the tags from the pins Break each pin off the base C Discard the pin part D Set each base C back into its original hole turning it 90 to lock i
16. Paper jam in the fusing unit 29 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Exhaust fan motor error oose connection of the exhaust fan The exhaust fan motor is locked for five motor seconds Overload ADF gate error 1 Defective ADF board The ADF sends the FGATE signal before it D Defective input output board is requested to scan originals Loose connection ADF gate abnormal 2 The ADF does not send the FGATE signal within 30 seconds after the ADF starts scanning Defective ADF connector e Defective SBU board ADF gate abnormal 3 The ADF continues to send the FGATE signal for more than 60 seconds after the Defective ADF connector ADF starts scanning Defective SBU board Mechanical total counter error Defective mechanical total counter The polling module does not detect the Defective BICU mechanical total counter Loose connection Engine total counter error t the total counter is not The checksum of the total counter is no Defective on the BICU correct Printer application program error The printer application program does not become ready when the printer Defective application program application program is necessary 30 SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 Image transfer error 955 The BICU requests the controller to transfer image data but the controller Defective application program does not become ready Status error laser opti
17. System ServiceCardNetFile ServiceCardNIB ServiceCardFAX ServiceCardWebSystem 169 6 System Maintenance Reference Program UpDate Menu P 01 ROM B2764567A NEW 2764567 08675504 When you have selected module the text lines are highlighted and Verify key and the Update key are displayed 8 Select a module and press the Update key Do NOT press the Verify key 9 The firmware update program starts and the message Loading is displayed KkK nu The update will begin and then will take a few minutes to complete The LCD will initially display mu Updating When the update is completed the LCD display will change to Update done or Updated Power Off On Update Done Engine Card No 1 1 b867s505 10 Check that the message Update Done is displayed Confirmation 1 Turn the main power switch off and on The LCD will display Please wait for about 60 seconds after which it will return to the Program UpDate Menu screen 2 Repeat Steps 1 8 above until all firmware updates are complete 3 Turn the main power switch off 4 Remove the SD card from the lower slot on the controller by pushing on the card to release the spring lock 170 Using SP Mode F SPF D068 D069 No Valid Data E24 b867s506 If an error occurs the error code is displayed For a list of information on error codes see the following tab
18. win deer eatin Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line and or rx cable equalizer setting Cross reference Reconstruction time G3 Switch OA bit 6 Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Check the connections between the FCU NCU amp line Check for line noise or other line problems EOL signal end of line from Replace the NCU or FCU the other end not received The remote machine may be defective or may have within 5 s of the previous EOL disconnected sianal g Cross reference Maximum interval between EOLs and between ECM frames G3 Bit Switch OA bit 4 210 0 22 0 23 Fax Error Codes Check the line connection Replace the NCU or FCU Defective remote terminal The signal from the other end was interrupted for more than Check for line noise or other line problems the acceptable modem carrier Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop time drop time default 200 ms Cross reference Acceptable modem carrier drop time G3 Switch OA bits O and 1 Check the line connection Replace the NCU or FCU Defective remote terminal Check for line noise or other line problems Too many errors during Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and or rx error criteria Cross reference Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Rx error criteria Communication Switch O2 bits O an
19. 0 1 step O Disabled 1 Enabled Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG 007 SSL Disable Oor 1 0 1 step O Uses the RCG certification 1 Does no use the RCG certification Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG RCG Connect T O 1 to 90 10 1 second step Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG RCG Write Timeout 1 to 100 60 1 second step Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG RCG Read Timeout 1 to 100 60 1 second step Enables disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method Port 80 Dor1 0 O Disabled 1 Enabled Selects the timing for the remote firmware updating Dor1 0 RFU Timing O Any status of a target machine 1 Sleep or panel off mode only 99 100 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Install Status This SP displays the RCG device installation status O RCG device not registered 1 RCG device registered 2 Device registered Connect Mode N M This SP displays and selects the embedded RCG connection method Internet connection 1 Dial up connection NotiTime ExpTime DFU 061 Proximity of the expiration of the certification HTTP Proxy Use 2 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center HTTP Proxy Host This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between embedded RCG N and t
20. 1006 Sample Locked print the document server is enabled or disables in accordance with copy service mode SP5 967 When you select 1 the document server is enabled regardless of service mode SP5 967 Scanner Program Mode Table Service Table Key Notation What it means Example 9 to 9 3 0 0 1 mm step The setting can be adjusted in the range 9 value reset to 3 0 after an NVRAM reset and the value can be range default step changed in 0 1 mm steps with each key press Comments added for your reference This value is stored in NVRAM After a RAM reset the default value factory setting is restored Denotes Design or Factory Use Do not change this value SP Mode Number Function and Setting 203 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Displays the scanner NV version 5 NV Version This shows as following Function _ Model _ Version Selects the compression type for binary picture Compression Type processing 1 MH 2 MR 3 MMR Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image Erase Margin If the machine has scanned the edge of the original create a margin O to 5 Omm 1mm step Enables or disables the network TWAIN scanner Remote Scan disable function O enable 1 disable Clears or does not clear a user information after a job User Info Release Dor 1 17 O Not clear 1 Clear Display or not display a Scan To Mult
21. Code e Standard for D072 ARDF C B872 Optional for basic Machine Configuration Mainframe F SPF D068 D069 C B b262v906a 1 pooo 5 Optional Components Machine Code Remarks 500 sheet Paper Feed Unit B B421 Handset F B433 NA only 1 Product Information System Components For D068 D069 d068v901 USB2 0 SD Slot D467 ion Option only for D069 SD card for the Printer Scanner Unit Printer Scanner unit D468 C Standard only for D069 HDD Encryption Unit D377 abs One from the three i Overwrite Security D362 ni wo mp Machine Configuration RAM DIMM G332 F Distributed with the printer scanner unit 15 1 Product Information Overview Component Layout Mainframe 34 33 32 31 30 29 b262d557 1 Exposure Lamp 20 ID Image Density Sensor 3 CCD SBU 22 Registration Sensor Overview ARDF f CN f n di s ge m 29 S ac u c E 1 0 AN dS NNNM b872d105 9 87 1 Separation Roller 7 Exit Roller 3 Pick up Roller 9 Registration Sensor 4 Original Set Sensor 10 Registration Roller 5 Inverter Roller 11 Inverter Sensor 1 Product Information 6 Junction Gate 12 Transport Roller Electrical Components Electrical Components 1 b262d558 18 1 Lens Block 11 ID Image Den
22. Feed At each paper feed e 1 Exit At each paper exit 5501 PM Alarm Interval 0 to 9999 0 1K copies step 5501 1 Specifies when the PM alarm occurs 5801 Memory Clear basic model only 5801 2 Engine Memory Clear in this section 5802 1 Conducts machine free run including the scanner unit Press ON to start press OFF to stop Input Check 5803 ag Input Check in this section Output Check 5804 ag Output Check in this section 188 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 Selects the display language 2 North America 3 Europe 5 Asia 6 China 5807 1 SP5 807 001 is not cleared by SP5 801 002 NOTE SC982 is displayed if you specify a language that is inconsistent with your local model 5811 Serial Num Input 5811 1 8 Serial Number Input in this section 5812 Service TEL Telephone 5812 1 Specifies the telephone number of the service representative The number is displayed when a service call condition occurs To input a dash press To delete the current telephone number press 9 Facsimile 90122 Specifies the fax number printed on user counter reports To input a dash press To delete the current fax number press D 5824 NVRAM Upload 5824 1 NVRAM Upload Download in this section 5825 Download 5825 1 V NVRAM Upload Download in this section 5827 Program Download i Firmware Update Procedure in this section Copy the software program fr
23. January 2009 Subject to change Important Safety Notices Prevention of Physical Injury 1 Be sure that the power cord is unplugged before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier or peripherals 2 The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible 3 Note that electrical voltage is supplied to some components of the copier and the paper tray unit even while the main power switch is off 4 If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components 5 If you start a job before the copier completes the warm up or initializing period keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components until job execution has started The copier will start making copies as soon as warm up or initialization is finished 6 The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands Health Safety Conditions Toner and developer are nontoxic but getting either of these into your eyes may cause temporary eye discomfort Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water If material remains in eye or if discomfort continues get medical attention Observance of Electrical Safety Standards The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer serv
24. Not used 6800EE H and 6800EF H User parameter switches 30 and 31 SWUSR 1E and 1F Not used 6800FO H User parameter switch 32 SWUSR 20 Bit Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type Service RAM Addresses O Paper output priority 7 Priority order 1 IP fax destination 2 Fax Number 3 E mail address 4 Folder 1 Electric putout order Priority order 1 E mail address 2 Folder 3 IP fax destination 4 Fax number Bits 1 to 7 Not used 6800F1 User parameter switch 33 SWUSR 21 Not used 6800F2 H User parameter switch 34 SWUSR 22 Bit Gatekeeper server used with IP Fax Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 SIP server used with IP Fax Disabled 1 Enabled Bits 2 to 7 Not used 680100 to 68010F H G4 Parameter Switches Not used 680110 to 68012F H G4 Internal Switches Not used 680130 to 68016F H Service Switches SCU Not used 680170 to 68017F H IFAX Switches 680180 to 68018F H IP FAX Switches 680190 to 6801AF H Service station s fax number SP3 101 6801B0 to 6801B9 H Own fax PABX extension number 6801BA to 6801C3 H Own fax number PSTN Not used 6801CA to 6801D7 H Own fax number ISDN G4 Not used 680108 to 6801E3 H The first subscriber number ISDN G3 Not used 6801EA to 6801EF H The second subscriber number ISDN G3 Not used 6801FO to 6801FB H The first subscriber number ISDN G4
25. On O to 1 0 11 Password NULL not permitted 1 Password NULL permitted Lockout Setting Lockout On Off Switches on off the lock on the local address book account O to 1 0 1 Off 1 On Lockout Threshold Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account lockouts 1 to 10 5 1 Cancel On Off Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and password after an account lockout has occurred O to 1 0 11 Off wait time lockout not cancelled 1 On system waits cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are entered Cancel Time Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user ID and password after a lockout has occurred This setting is used only if SP5413 3 is setto 1 on to 999 60 min 88 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Mitigation On Off 001 Switches on off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are identical O to 1 0 1 Mitigation Time 002 Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs and passwords O to 60 15 1 min 5415 Password Attack Permissible Number 001 Sets the number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain illegal access to the system O to 100 30 1 attempt Detect Time 002 Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been detected 1 to 10 5
26. The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the black level ten times at the offset adjustment Defective exposure lamp 142 The automatic SBU adjustment has failed Unclean white plate to correct the white level ten times at the Incorrect position or width of white PGA adjustment plate scanning i SP4 01 5 Defective SBU board Loose connection of the flat cable between the BICU and the SBU The BICU cannot correctly establish Defective flat cable between the BICU communication with the SBU and the SBU Defective BICU Defective SBU Defective exposure lamp The white levels of the white plate and the Unclean white plate white paper are extraordinarily different Incorrect position or width of white during the Scan Auto Adjustment plate scanning i SP4 01 5 5 4 428 001 Defective BICU board Defective SBU board 25 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Image transfer error Scanned images nottransferredtothe Defective BICU board controller memory within one minute Defective controller board Memory address error Inconsistency between the BICU The BICU does not receive the memory firmware and the controller firmware dd t from th troller withi Eae oven HR Defective BICU one minute Defective controller Polygonal mirror motor error Defective polygon mirror motor The polygon mirror motor does not reach jose decem the operating speed wi
27. Vp 4 5V or fecti SP2 221 5 Vt Vi 02V TD sensor defective Using SP Mode Basic D067 D072 Using SP Mode Basic D067 D072 NVRAM Data Upload Download SP5 824 825 A CAUTION Make sure that you turn off the main power switch before inserting or removing a flash memory card Data in the memory may be corrupted if you insert or remove the memory card with the main power switch on This section illustrates how to copy the data from the BICU to a memory card NVRAM Data Upload Download writing onto open space on card or from a memory card to the BICU wr Data Upload Download Overview You can copy the data from the NVRAM to a flash memory card NVRAM Upload or from a flash memory card to the NVRAM NVRAM download SP5 824 1 Upload From the BICU to a flash memory card SP5 825 1 NVRAM Download From a flash memory card to the BICU You should execute NVRAM Upload before replacing the NVRAM or before executing SP5 801 002 Memory Clear gt Engine You can copy back the data from the flash memory card to the as necessary NVRAM Upload SP5 824 001 1 Turn off the main switch Remove the interface cover P x 1 Turn the face of the flash memory card to the rear of the copier and insert it into the card slot 2 Turn on the main power switch Activate the SP mode and select SP5 824 001 The copier overwrites the data in th
28. When the amount of SAF memory available falls below this setting mail can no longer be received received mail is then stored on the mail server OO FF O to 1024 KB HEX Thehexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory Bit Switches l fax Switch 09 SP No 1 102 010 FUNCTION COMMENTS This setting determines the number of retries when AT Basic TX connection and transmission fails due to errors 01 1 15 l fax Switch OA Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 011 l fax Switch OB Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 012 l fax Switch OC Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 013 l fax Switch OD Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 014 l fax Switch OE Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 015 l fax Switch OF SP No 1 102 016 FUNCTION COMMENTS Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output immediately 0 Off Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery 1 On Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations Printer Switches Printer Switch OO SP No 1 103 001 299 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Select page separation marks 0 Off 1 On Repetition of data when the received page is longer than the printer pap
29. both TCP and UDP IP Fax transmission speed setting 28 282 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 CCM connection O No CCM connection 1 connection Message reception selection from non registered SIP server O Answer 1 Not answer ECM communication setting No limit for image compression 1 Limit for image compression IP Fax Switch O3 SP No 1 111 004 Effective field limitation for G3 standard function information OFF 1 Abyte DIS Switching between G3 standard and G3 non standard O Enable switching 1 G3 standard only When 1 is selected only the connection call message with H 323 or no tunneled H 245 is transmitted via CCM This answers the INVITE message from the SIP server not registered for the machine 1 This does not receive the INVITE message from the SIP server not registered for the machine and send a refusal message This does not limit the type of the image compression with ECM communication 1 When the other end machine is Ciscco this permits the image compression other than JBIG or MMR with ECM communication COMMENTS Limits the effective field for standard G3 function information Enables disables switching between standard and G3 non standard ECM frame size selection at transmitting 0 25 6byte 1 64byte DIS detection times for echo prevention 1 time 1 2 times Selects the ECM frame
30. iow285 71 sp 4658 3 Displays the white offset value of the pre offset adjustment 4658 4 GREEN 4658 5 BLUE 4882000 5 Displays the black offset value of the pre offset adjustment in the SBU 4902 Exposure Lamp ON O OFF 1 ON Turns the exposure lamp on or off To turn on the exposure lamp specify 1 to turn it off specify 184 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 4903 1 Adjusts the ADS level 4904 ADS Lower Limit 255 80 1 step 4904 1 Adjusts the ADS lower limit 4905 ADS Area Select 0 All 1 One Checks the whole area All or the specific areas 1 One to adjust the ADS level The specific areas are as follows ARDF 37 5 mm from the center e Platen Cover 15 to 90 mm from the left edge 4921 Image Adj Selection 4921 Selects which mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 are used for None 1 Text 1 2 Text 2 37 Photo 1 4 Photo 2 5 Photo 3 6 Special 1 7 Special 2 8 Special 3 9 Special 4 10 Special 5 m Tue Selects text or photo asthe priority output mode This 4922 1 Copy setting is applied to all image processing modes of 5 4 921 Notch Selection 4923 Selects the value of the center ID adjustment notch for the ID adjustment LEDs e Normally the center notch is range 1 5 If 1 is selected each notch shifts down becomes lighter If 1 is selected each notch shifts
31. ses V27ter V29 V33 invalid V27ter V29 V17 V34 is not supported for IP Fax communication IP Fax Switch 07 SP No 1 111 008 FUNCTION COMMENTS TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS S O Not added 1 Added DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout O Not transmitted Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout 1 Transmitted No hang up reception 1 Hang up after transmitting DCN Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done at the 1 time 1 2 times same bit rate Space CSI transmission setting at no CSI redis o When is selected frame data is enabled When 1 is selected the transmitted data is all spaces 1 Transmitted Hang up setting at DIS reception 3 disabled Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS Bit Switches IP Fax Switch 08 SP No 1 111 009 timer adjustment Adjusts the T1 timer The default is 35 seconds Bit 1 O Bit O O 35 sec Bit 1 O Bit 1 40 sec Bit 1 1 BitO O 50 sec Bit 1 1 1 60 sec TO timer adjustment Adjusts the fail safe timer This timer sets the interval Em 076 between setup data transmission and T 38 phase decision If your destination return is late on the Bit 5 O Bit 4 1 120 sec network or G3 fax return is late adjust the longer Bit 5 1 Bit 4 O 180 sec interval timer Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 2 240
32. 1 Longer than double letter well log up to 1 200 mm Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Fax mode settings such as resolution before a mode key Copy Fax Printer Scanner is pressed Not cleared 1 Cleared Bits 4 to 7 Not used 6800DF H User parameter switch 15 SWUSR_OF This switch is not printed on the user parameter list Bits O and 2 Cassette for fax printout Bit 2 O Bit 1 O Bit O 1 1st paper feed station Bit 2 O Bit 1 1 Bit O O 2nd paper feed station Bit 2 O Bit 1 1 Bit O 1 3rd paper feed station Bit 2 1 Bit 1 O Bit O O Ath paper feed station Bit 2 1 Bit 1 O Bit O 1 2 LCT Other settings Not used Bits 3 and 4 Not used Bit 5 Using the cassette specified by bits 1 and 2 above only On 1 Off Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E0 H User parameter switch 16 SWUSR_10 This switch is not printed on the user parameter list Bits and 1 Not used Bit 2 Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4 LT size paper is not available A3 has priority 1 BA has priority Bits 3 to 7 Not used 6800E1 H User parameter switch 17 SWUSR 11 Bits and 1 Not used Bit 2 Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick Speed dials is selected for broadcasting O Not needed 1 Needed Bit 3 Not used Service RAM Addresses Bit 4 Reconfirmation of an address before press Start key Not displayed 1 Displayed Bits 5 and 6 Not used B
33. 120 008 02 04 047 048 049 050 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information managed Dor 1 0 Folder Auth chg O Login user name 1 address book AddrB Acl Info Address Book Access Control List Information This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD However the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator atthis stage Executing this SP by the service technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users Addr B Media Displays the slot number where an address book data is in Clears the local address book information including the Ini Local Addr B user code Ini Deli Addr B Clears the distribution address book information except user code lears the LDAP kintonnon Hh Ini LDAP Addr B Clears the address book information except the user code Clears all directory information managed by UCS including all user codes Ini All Addr B the main power switch off and on after executing this Bkup All Addr B Uploads all directory information to the SD card Restr All Addr B Downloads all directory info
34. 3 Turn the SD card label face A to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear a click 4 Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected 5 Turn on the main power switch 6 Input a machine serial number with SP 5811 001 7 Go into the SP mode and push EXECUTE with SP5 878 001 8 Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch Then turn off the main power switch 9 Turn on the machine power O Go into the User Tools mode and select System Settings Administrator Tools Auto Erase Memory Setting On 11 Exit the User Tools mode 83 84 2 Installation HDD Encryption Unit D377 Before You Begin the Procedure 1 Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings e Supervisor login password Administrator login name Administrator login password These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed 2 Confirm that Admin Authentication is on User Tools gt System Settinas Administrator Tools gt Administrator Authentication y 9 Manaaement Admin Authentication gt On 9 If this setting is Off tell the customer that this setting must be On before you can do the installation procedure 3 Confirm that Administrator Tools is selected and enabled User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Availab
35. 319 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 320
36. 6 Screw the paper tray unit into place using three supplied PTU fastening screws 44 Paper Tray Unit Heater 7 Open the front door and remove the copy tray 7 P x1 8 Close the front door d068i102b 1 Open the right cover 2 Remove the interface cover 8 F x 1 3 Remove the rear cover 9 P 5 45 2 Installation A cxt TIN 10 Vu Fj S 068 921 4 For D068 D069 Remove the upper left cover 10 5 For D068 D069 Remove the controller box 11 EP x 1 F x 6 b130i905 6 Remove the support bracket 12 P x 3 46 Paper Tray Unit Heater b046i520 7 Pass the heater harness through the hole 15 at the rear of the copier 8 Pass relay harness 16 through the opening 17 at the rear of the PSU and through the other opening 15 9 Connect the relay harness to the heater s harness 18 20 25 24 22 b046i521 10 Pull the relay harness back into the copier A7 2 Installation 11 Attach the ferrite core 19 over the relay harness 12 Push the ferrite core back so that it is over the heater s harness 13 Wrap the heater s harness once around the ferrite core 20 14 Locate the ferrite core at the rear 24 of the copier behind the rear clamps 15 Secure the ferrite core with the supplied tie wrap 21 16 Clip off the excess length of the tie wrap 17 Connect the relay harness connector
37. A on the controller board 2 Install the HDD unit B in the controller board P x 3 The screw A is used in this step 3 Reinstall the controller board in the machine After Installing the HDD 1 Do SP5832 001 to format the hard disk Do SP5853 001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk Do SP5846 040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller board Do SP5846 04A1 to let the user get access to the address book 2 9 4 5 Turn the main power switch off on DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type D362 Before You Begin the Procedure 1 Confirm that the DataOverwriteSecurity unit SD card is the correct type for the machine The correct type for this machine is Type I 2 Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values e Supervisor login password 8 2 Installation Administrator login name Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure 3 Make sure that Admin Authentication is ON System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication IF this setting is OFF tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation procedure 4 Make sure that Administrator Tools is enabled selected System Setti
38. BCD 680383 H Day BCD 680384 H Hour 680385 H Minute 680386 H Second 680387 H 00 Monday 01 Tuesday 02 Wednesday 06 Sunday 680394 H Optional equipment Not used 680395 H Optional equipment Read only Do not change the settings Bits O to 3 Not used Bit 4 G3 2 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 5 G3 3 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 6 and 7 Not used 680401 to 68040D Not used 680410 H G3 1 Modem ROM version Read only 680412 H G3 2 Modem ROM version Not used 680414 H G3 3 Modem ROM version Not used 680420 H Number of multiple sets print Read only 680476 H Time for economy transmission Not used 68048C H Dial in BCD 680492 H Transmission monitor volume 00 07 680493 H Reception monitor volume OO 07 H 680494 H On hook monitor volume OO 07 H 680495 H Dialing monitor volume OO 07 680496 H Buzzer volume OO 07 H 680497 H Beeper volume 00 07 H 6804A8 H Machine code Check ram 4 6804D2 H Serial number Max 8 characters ASCII 685E6C to 685E6F H Transmission counter HEX 685E70 to 685E73 H Reception counter HEX 685EDC to 685EDF H E mail transmission counter HEX 685EE0 to 685EE3 H E mail reception counter HEX 688E8E to 6891 8D H SIP server address Read only 688E8E H Proxy server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 688FOE H Proxy server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 688F8E H
39. E Lamp Lamp Stabilizer Board 99 xposure Lamp LOMP BOO NR TTA 5 QO Scanner RR D Alignment Adjustm 102 SVS NIG FINS IN TT T i 104 Fusing Uni 104 Exit S 105 PAT ETS OM E E E E Hot Roller Stri Pawl 105 OPROTI DOT FOWE sasien E OE Hot Roll d Fusing Lam 106 ana LOM PDT E Es hermoswitch d Thermi 108 ermoswitches an A E T EIEI EA AEI E I Pressure ROE a iii Checking the NIP band 110 ecking the ojjo M CU and Q hing Lam eneRe i re eel mo o to eT ee tener errr ore Q hing Lam 112 Ure telat tto o E EA E NE AENA ANEN E TT h F d Main M 113 xhaust Fan an CLIT IO a P TAE EA FE NOSE ER EAEE E Main M 114 Paper o Es P Feed Roll d Friction Pad 115 deenteso ROWSE a a Frichon Registration SIN SON Bypass Paper End Bypass Feed Clutch and Friction Pad sss Paper Feed and Registration mage B Co 1153 PRIN NI IRR RR del
40. In other words the left margin defined in the job usually lt ESC gt r0A will be changed to lt ESC gt r1A 167 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch Disabled Enabled single multiple copy If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies only a single copy is output by default Using this BitSw the device can be configured to print Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a job is PS data or not Pattern3 includes most PS commands Pattern A small number of PS tags and headers Type settings to 1000 The default is 100 bit Method for determining the image rotation for the Disable Enable edge to bring on bit4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 Disable Enable jobs 100 1000 Enabled Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via Job Enabled The image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs The old models are below PCL Pre O4A models bit7 Letterhead mode printing Enable Disable Duplex Routes all pages through the duplex unit If this is disabled simplex pages or the last page of an odd paged duplex job are not routed through the duplex unit This could result in problems wi
41. Only For D068 D069 aep iren Pn c 207 IFAX Troubles aro oM 1o ERN eJ 226 IPsFax TG Uta SOO TING utet on tetto tne Letra EN a 229 Jun gor LES e Mm 229 oce re ert E etre mre ee ad reer ONE SDN MADE END ere 232 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 System Service EDU RUA EHE 295 eee ee A EDU EISE LE 235 SP2 XXX RAM Data dd 236 SP3 XXX AUS irren 10 RR T 236 SPA A V E OE S aset 237 PIAA UMN UN ZUM o MR stesso EP 238 SPORA KA REDO SO Ree Cr 238 SPAZA SS NA 240 EEE E E NEE sss sg RC E E 242 teats 242 ISO dea D A ee T 254 A C IMEEM IMMER MM UEUEE 259 Communication SWIC OS deter S reete eta aevas ctr tbe mes exwcebuloec ev tease 264 4 SN Te RINT TK aeuum 270 VF d I 279 288 Dedicated Transmission 302 FE AINE 302 ERIT ARR
42. Redirect server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 68900E H Redirect server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 68908E H Registrar server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 689 OE H Registrar server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 68918E H Gatekeeper server address Main Max 128 characters ASCII 68920E H Gatekeeper server address Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 68928E H Arias Number Max 128 characters ASCII 68930E H SIP user name Max 128 characters ASCII 68938E H SIP authentication password Max 128 characters ASCII 68938E H SIP digest authentication password Max 128 characters ASCII 68940E H Gateway address information Max 7100 characters ASCII 68AFCA H Stand by port number for H 232 connection 68AFCCH Stand by port number for SIP connection 68AFCE H RAS port number 68AFDO H Gatekeeper port number 68AFD2 H Port number of data waiting for T 38 68AFDA H Port number of SIP server 68AFD6 H Priority for SIP and H 323 0 H 323 1 SIP 68AFD7 H SIP function O Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFD8 H H 323 function O Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFD9 H SIP digest authentication function Disabled 1 Enabled 68AFDA H IP Fax backup data 00 600 69ECBE H 69ECDE H Dial tone detection parameter Max 11 x 3 lines Service RAM Addresses This initializes following order 0 04 0x40 0x03 0x60 0x64 Oxf4 Ox01 0x64 0x04 Oxc8 0x00
43. System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857 2 SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number Refer to the chapter Trouble Shooting for a list of SC error codes Turns the save function on off for SC codes generated by copier engine errors 001 Engine SC Dor 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Turns the save function on off for SC codes generated by GW controller errors 002 Controller SC ded Dor 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Any SC 0 to 65535 1 step Turns the save function on off for jam errors 004 Jam Dor 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 5889 Debugtog Sovekey 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board 000000 9999999 to 9999999 0 wet 127 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Sets the amount of time to wait before saving mail that breaks up during reception The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time MDN Res RFC2298 1 1 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail No 1 Yes SMTP Aut Field Rep Oto 1 707 022 Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated O No From item not switched 1 Yes From item switche
44. This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application from the PC through the copier to the destination e When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting the pages are only counted once For example a 10 page fax is sent to location A and location B The counter goes up by 10 not 20 TX PGS Port 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them For example if a 3 page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4 the count for ISDN G3 GA is 12 wma 0p 8711 lesanPOS Csinp 0 to 99999999 0 1 S Scan PGS Comp 0 to 99999999 0 1 8715 These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode TIFF M S Multi Single om p 197 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 8741 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them omw 8 771 This SP counts the total number of developed images Toner Botol Info BICU 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 781 This SP counts the total number of developed images This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply 1 steps is better than other machines on the market that can only measure in increments of 10 10
45. board Replace the controller board MLB defective Defective NVRAM Defective software 1 Unexpected hardware resource e g memory shortage SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 card A necessary font is not found in the SD M The SD card data is corrupted card when the printer application starts 1 Check that the SD card stores correct data Net file error adam The management file for net files is Anecessary fontis notfound in the SD 921 corrupted net files are not normally Ee hardware read Data corruption Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation e When this error occurs the file name address and data will be Software defective stored This Internal parameter incorrect information can be checked by EE g y using SP7 403 See the data and the situation in which this SC occurs Then report the data and conditions to your technical control center Defective software The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation However Logged only the machine can unlike SC990 the process can keep on continue to operate running Undefined error 992 An error not controlled by the system occurred the error does not come Defective software program under any other SC code A7 3 Appendix Service Call C
46. transmit mode 0 MH only 1 Disabled ECM during transmission Bit 7 O Bit 6 O Off Bit 7 O Bit 6 1 On Bit 7 1 Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Disabled 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 The machine uses inch based resolutions for scanning If inch only is selected the printed copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if that machine uses mm based resolutions If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used 0 1 Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering with the set up protocol at the start of transmission The machine will then wait for the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used If transmissions to a specific destination always end at a lower modem rate 14 400 bps or lower disable V 8 protocol so as not to use V 34 protocol 0 V 34 communication will not be possible If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used This bit determines the capabilities that are informed to the other terminal during transmission If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used For example if ECM is switched on but is not wanted when sending to a particular terminal use the O O setting V 8 V 34 protocol and JBIG compression are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled e Ifthe setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is
47. unit 4 kbytes e g O6 H 24 kbytes One page is about 24 kbytes The available memory threshold below which ringing detection and The machine refers to this setting before each fax reception therefore reception into memory is If the amount of remaining memory is below this threshold disabled the machine cannot receive any fax messages IF this setting is kept at O the machine will detect ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there is no memory available This will result in communication failure Communication Switch OE SP No 1 104 015 FUNCTION COMMENTS O6 to FF Hex unit 2 s 0 7 Minimum interval between e g O6 H 12 s automatic dialing attempts This value is the minimum time that the machine waits before it dials the next destination Communication Switch OF Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 10 SP No 1 104 017 FUNCTION COMMENTS Memory transmission Maximum number of dialing attempts to the 01 FE Hex times same destination Communication Switch 11 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 12 SP No 1 104 019 FUNCTION COMMENIS Memory transmission Interval O 7 between dialing attempts to the FF Hex minutes same destination 268 Bit Switches Communication Switch 13 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 14 SP No 1 104 021 O In immediate transmission da
48. 006 ule 7 Adjust the side to side registration SP 1 002 8 Specify zero in SP5 902 001 after finishing the adjustment procedure Adjusting Blank Margin Use the Trimming Area Pattern SP5 902 001 gt 10 for this adjustment 1 Print out the test pattern C B D b130r936 2 Measure the distance between the four edges of the image area and the four edges of the paper A B C D e The diagram shows the paper on the copy tray Note that the paper is output with the face down 150 Adjusting Copy Image Area Adjust the blank margin SP2 101 eme SP2 101 002 Trailing Edge B 2 2 5 1 5 mm PTS SP2 101 004 Right Side D 2 2 5 1 5 mm The Left Side and Right Side comes to your left hand side and right hand side respectively cam when you view the copied image with the leading edge upwards 4 Specify O zero in SP5 902 001 after finishing the adjustment procedure Adjusting Main Scan Magnification Use the Grid Pattern Single Dot SP5 902 001 5 for this adjustment SP2 998 001 Main Mag print 100 126 Print out the test pattern Measure the sides of squares Each side should be 2 7 mm long Adjust the main scan magnification SP2 998 001 Main Mag print KR WwW N Specify zero in SP5 902 001 after finishing the adjustment procedure Scanning Preparation e Before adjusting scanning adjust printing
49. 03 7 O4 8 1 EQM value Line quality data A larger number means more errors 2 Symbol rate V 34 only 3 Final modem type used 4 Starting data rate for example 288 means 28 8 kbps 5 Final data rate 6 Rx revel refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level 7 Total number of error lines that occurred during non ECM reception 8 Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non ECM reception EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at OO for transmission records and ECM reception records Rx level calculation Example 0000 32 V34 288 264 LO1 00 03 04 The four digit hexadecimal value N after L indicates the rx level The high byte is given first followed by the low byte Divide the decimal value of N by 16 to get the rx level In the above example the decimal value of N 0100 H is 256 So the actual rx level is 256 16 16 dB Line error mark print When 1 is selected a line error mark is printed on the OFF 1 ON print printout if a line error occurs during reception G3 G4 communication parameter This is a fault finding aid The LCD shows the key parameters display see below This is normally disabled because it cancels Disabled the CSI display for the user 1 Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to O after testing 243 244 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For
50. 1 Communication Switch 1C SP No 1 104 029 Refer to communication switch 1B Extension access code 8 and 9 to turn V 8 protocol On Off Example If 8 is the PSTN access code set bit O to 1 2207 When the machine detects 8 as the first dialed number it automatically disables V 8 protocol IF 9 is the PSTN access code use bit 1 2 7 Do not change the settings Communication Switch 1D Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 1E Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 1F Not used do not change the settings 1 Off G3 1 Switches G3 Switch 00 SP No 1 105 001 Monitor speaker during 0 0 The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication tx and rx communication Bit 1 O Bit O Disabled 0 1 The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T 30 tocol Bit 1 O Bit O 1 Up to Phase B protoco Bit 1 1 Bir O O All the time 1 0 Used for testing The monitor speaker is on all through the communication Make sure that you reset these bits after Bit 1 1 Bit O 1 Reserved testing 270 Bit Switches Monitor speaker during memory 1 The monitor speaker is enabled during memory transmission Disabled 1 Enabled G3 Switch 01 SP No 1 105 002 FUNCTION COMMENTS 1 The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be DIS frame length transmitted set to 1 if there are communication problems transm
51. 21 2 Appendix Preventive Maintenance Tables LLL Pressweroler o Wemerbesings R o Pressure roller w 01 9 0 mem 9 0 Hot roller stripper pawls ARDF ve em _ _ TT T NNNM Mm _ _ Registration sensor 9 Water or alcohol reflector PAPER TRAY UNIT mem 22 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 Summary There are four levels of service call conditions To prevent possible damage the machine does not Activate the SP mode and turn the operate until the service representative resets the SC main power switch off and on code Turning the main power switch off and on resets the SC Turn the main power switch off and code if the error is caused by incorrect sensor detection on The machine operates as usual excluding the unit Turn the main power switch off and related to the service call on The SC history is updated The machine operates as No SC code is displayed Only the usual SC history is updated e f a problem involves circuit boards see if you can solve the problem by disconnecting and reconnecting all connectors before deciding to replace a circuit board e Ifa problem involves a motor lock check the mechanical load before deciding to replace a motor Or Sensor e If working on a fax e
52. 2uA O20pA 1 2 2 ick Specia Saul ee Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from the by pass tray Use a high setting a if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper from the by pass tray or b if waste toner is re attracted from the drum which can occur when using transparencies 176 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 2 4 12 2u 020pA 1 2 2 Duplex 4 uA 2301 3 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when carrying out a duplex job Use this SP if there is poor image transfer on the rear side of duplex copies 23014 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller for roller cleaning Increase the current if toner remains on the roller after cleaning Remaining toner may cause dirty background on the rear side 2802 Forced Develpr Churn Initializes the developer and checks the TD sensor output Vt The machine mixes the developer for 2 minutes while reading and displaying the Vt value The machine does not initialize the TD sensor output If the machine has not been used for a long period prints may have a dirty background In a case like this use this SP to mix the developer The message Completed is displayed when the program ends normally 2906 Tailing Crctn Shifts the image position at the intervals specified by SP2 906 002 When the copier is continuously printing vertical lines such as in tables the paper may not se
53. 802 1 1la g Wireless LAN B W 600 dpi Resolution Full color 300 dpi 600 dpi 100BASE TX 1 Appendix Specifications Variable range of scan Setting range 100 dpi 600 dpi resolution 1 Scanning speeds vary according to machine operating conditions computer specifications network traffic software etc and original types Desktop type transceiver Circuit PBX Book Face down Maximum Width 216 mm 8 5 inch ARDF Face up Single sided document Original Size Length 139 1200 mm 5 5 47 2 inch Width 139 216 mm 5 5 8 5 inch Double sided document Length 160 356 mm 6 3 14 0 inch Width 139 216 mm 5 5 8 5 inch Scanning Method Flat bed with CCD G3 8 x 3 85 lines mm Standard 8 x 7 7 lines mm Detail 8 x 15 4 line mm Fine 200 x 100 dpi Standard 200 x 200 dpi Detail Resolution G3 3 at 28 8Kbps Measured with G3 ECM using memory for an ITU T 1 test document Slerexe letter at standard resolution Transmission Time 10 Specifications V 34 V 33 V 17 TCM V 29 QAM Modulation V 27ter G3 V 8 V 21 G3 G3 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 Data Rate 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Automatic fallback With ECM ms line I O Rate Without ECM 2 5 5 10 20 or 40 ms line Memory Capacity IFAX Specifications Connectivity Resolution ECM 128 KB SAF Standard 4 MB Page Memory S
54. Appendix SP Mode Tables System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 Service Mode Tables SP1 XXX Feed aoo LE Registration 9 0 to 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 1001 1 All Trays Adjusts the leading edge registration Adjusting 1001 2 Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 1002 S to S Regist 9 0 to 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 1002 1 Ist T 00000 Adjusts the side to side registration Adjusting Copy 1002 2 2nd Tray Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment SP1 002 001 is applied to all trays 1002 3 3rd Tray SP1 002 002 003 and 005 adjusts the difference from SP1 002 001 Adjusts the side to side registration of the 2nd side in 1002 6 Duplex duplex copying The 1st side is adjusted by SP1 002 001 through 005 1003 limits the amount of paper buckle on the registration roller System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 Enables or disables the contact release control The following table lists the results Fusing Temp Adj Adjusts the target fusing temperature Note that the thermistor is at the center of the hot roller 1105 9 Thick Center 140 to 185 165 1 C step Display Fusing 1106 1 Center and Leading edge Displays the fusing temperature Fusing Soft Start DFU Adjusts the number of zero cross cycles of the fusing lamp AC supply needed to bring the fusing lamp power to 10076 while bringing the lamp up to the standby tempe
55. BICU and Controller Board BICU and Controller Board A CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before starting replacement Before turning off the main power switch check that no mechanical component is operating Mechanical components may stop out of their home positions if you turn off the main power switch while they are operating The component may be damaged if you try to remove it when it is not in the home position For basic models D067 D072 The table lists the components and necessary maintenance work BICU Controller NVRAM Controller Box NVRAM Maintenance Work Save the data from the NVRAM to a Basic Installed None None memory card before replacing the NVRAM BICU Preparation Before replacing the NVRAM be sure to save the NVRAM data e Saving from the BICU to an SD card i NVRAM Data Upload Download 125 126 4 Replacement and Adjustment Procedure o INC k NN 1 Rear cover Rear Cover ra fly E eR Vx TEE B BT X 2 d068r921b 2 Scanner upper left cover i Operation Panel and Upper Covers 3 Bracket atthe left rear frame basic models DO67 D072 Px 2 or controller box A F SPF models D068 D069 F x 6 x 1 b130r920 4 Ground plate B F x 2 BICU and Controller Board 5 BICU C all 2 flat cables x 6 When replacing the BICU remo
56. D068 D069 p This is only used for communication troubleshooting It Protocol dump list output after eac shows the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol communication 0 Off On signals Always reset this bit to O after finishing testing If system switch O9 bit 6 is at 1 the list is only printed if there was an error during the communication System Switch O1 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 02 SP No 1 101 003 FUNCTION COMMENTS Force after transmission stall Off With this setting on the machine resets itself automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to complete the job 1 On Memory read write by RDS Bit 7 O Bit 6 0 0 All RDS systems are always locked out Always disabled 0 1 1 0 Normally RDS systems are locked out but the Bit 7 O Bit 6 1 user can temporarily switch RDS onto allow RDS operations to take place RDS will automatically be locked out again User selectable a after a certain time which is stored in System Switch Bit 7 1 Bit 6 0 Note that if an RDS operation takes place RDS will not User selectable switch off until this time limit has expired Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 1 1 At any time an RDS system can access the machine Always enabled System Switch O3 SP No 1 101 004 Bit Switches Length of time that RDS is 00 99 hours BCD temporarily switched on when bits 6 This setting is
57. Gateway 15 44 Addresses Over The number for the Off Ramp Gateway exceeded the limit of 30 15 61 Attachment File Format Error The attached file is not TIFF format 222 Fax Error Codes Could not receive transmission due to Resolution error Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without extended memory Resolution is not supported TIFF File Compatibility Error Page size error The page size was larger than A3 Compression error File was compressed with other than MH MR or MMR The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be received because the TIFF header is incorrect TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported The TIFF file attachment is corrupted Software error The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF decompression error TIFF D ion E The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted Software error The file could not be received because the attachment Not Binary Image Data was not binary image data Could not find the Disposition line in the header of the MDN Status Error Return Receipt or there is a problem with the firmware Could not find the Original Message ID line in the MDN Message ID Error header of the Return Receipt or there is a problem with the firmware Could not receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not Mail Job Task Read Error be created this
58. If both addresses contain FF Hz BCD tone detection is 580505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit disabled low byte PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit 680506 high byte If both addresses contain FF Hz BCD H tone detection is 680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit disabled low byte 680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 680509 PSTN dial tone reset time LOW DN the machine pauses for the 68050A PSTN dial tone reset time HIGH pause time address 68050D 68050E 68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time 20 ms Italy See Note 2 68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time 68050D PSTN wait interval LOW 68050E PSTN wait interval HIGH Detection is disabled if thi 68050F PSTN ring back tone detection time 20 ms contains FF PSTN detection time for silent period 680511 20 PSTN detection time for silent period 680512 20 680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit high byte If both addresses contain FF Hz BCD tone detection is 580514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit diues low byte 290 NCU Parameters PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit 680515 high byte IF both addresses contain FF Hz BCD tone detection is 680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit disabled low byte PABX dial tone frequency upper limit 680517 high byte If both addresses contain FF Hz BCD H tone detection is 680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit disabled lo
59. NVRAM Total Count e C O P O Count Firmware Update Procedure This section illustrates how to update the firmware of the GW machine the machine with the optional controller box To update the firmware for the GW machine you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD Secure Digital Card The SD Card is inserted into the uppermost slot on the right side of the controller box viewed from the back of the machine Before You Begin An SD card is a precision device so always observe the following precautions when handling SD cards Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card Never insert the SD card into the slot with the power on When the power is switched on never remove the SD card from the service slot Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature high humidity or exposure to direct sunlight Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them Never drop an SD card or expose it to other shock or vibration Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware update software 167 6 System Maintenance Reference e Upload means to send data from the machine to the SD card and download means to send data from the SD card to the machine To select an item on the LCD screen press the appropriate
60. Print 185 186 6 System Maintenance Reference QU Ss i im e Be sure to print out all the lists You have to manually change the SP settings if the data upload ends abnormally Select SP5 801 002 Press the OK key Select Execute The messages Execute followed by Escape and Execute are displayed Select Execute When the program has ended normally the message Completed is displayed If the program has ended abnormally an error message is displayed Press the escape key 9 Turn the main switch off and on Download the data from a flash memory card Data Upload Download ID Sensor Error Analysis SP2 221 The image quality may become very bad when the ID sensor does not operate properly However there is no such SC code that indicates ID sensor malfunction instead SP2 221 shows you some information on the ID sensor Check this information when the image quality is not very good The table lists the information shown with SP2 221 ID Sensor Error Analysis SP2 221 1 Vsg Vsg lt 2 5V or VG in the display Vsg Vsp 1 00V ID sensor defective ID sensor dirty Drum not charged Toner density very low SP2 221 2 Vsp Vsp gt 2 5V or VP in the display Vsg Vsp lt 1 00V ID sensor pattern not SP2 221 3 Power PW in the display created Vsg lt 3 5V ID sensor defective Power source when maximum power I
61. SC error Reboot Mode code If the same SC occurs again the machine does not reboot 1 The machine does not reboot when an SC error OCCUTS The reboot is not executed for Type A B or C SC codes 129 130 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Selects the reboot method for SC 002 Reboot Method 0or1 0 O Manual reboot 1 Automatic reboot 5878 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security EN Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit Press EXECUTE on the operation panel Then turn the Encryption Option machine off and on 5881 Delete Fixed Sent Delete Fixed Sent Deletes the fixed form sentence 5885 Set WIM Function Detect Mem Leak 5887 SD GetCounter SSP This SP saves the counter list of the machine to an SD card in the slot 3 The folder of SD COUNTER must be made in an SD card for this SP Person Info Prot Selects the protection level for logs Oto 1 O0 1 No authentication No protection for logs 1 No authentication Protected logs an administrator can see the logs System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 5902 5902 1 Test Pattern Print in this section Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function These names are stored in the NVRAM When the NVRAM data is corrupted select these names once again Use the right arrow or left arrow key to scroll through the list of brand names To select a brand name press the OK key An asterisk indicates
62. Slot 1 Insert an SD card or USB memory device in the slot You can connect only one removable memory device at a time 2 Close the media slot cover If you leave the cover open static electricity conducted through an inserted SD card could cause the machine to malfunction Make sure that previous settings remain If a previous setting remains press the Clear Modes key Place an original on the exposure glass Press Store File Press Store to Memory Device Press OK Press the Start key EX ix e X When writing is complete a confirmation message appears 9 Press Exit 63 2 Installation 10 Remove the memory device from the media slot Do not remove the memory device while writing is in process 64 Optional Paper Tray Grip Handle Optional Paper Tray Grip Handle The following procedure is for the paper tray for the main copier or optional paper tray unit Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below 2 04611100 65 2 Installation Installation Procedure l 66 Remove the paper tray A from the main copier d461i101 Turn the paper tray over to the opposite side Lower the paper tray grip handle B into the paper tray slot as shown with the arrow in the above illustration Attach the grip handle to the paper tray P x 2 When attaching auxiliary handle two screws attached from bottom hol
63. The control channel started after an unsuccessful primary channel The line was disconnected because PPR was transmitted received 9 default times within the same ECM frame Only one V 21 connection flag was received JBIG compression or reconstruction error JBIG data reconstruction error BIH error JBIG data reconstruction error Float marker error JBIG data reconstruction error End marker error JBIG data reconstruction error Timeout JBIG trailing edge maker error The machine resets itself for a fatal FCU system error 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 The receiving terminal restarted the control channel because data reception in the primary channel was not successful e This does not result in an error communication Try using a lower data rate at the start Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting Replace the FCU Turn off the machine then turn it back on Update the modem ROM Replace the FCU JBIG data error e Check the sender s JBIG function Update the MBU ROM e FCU defective e Check the destination device e fthisisfrequent update the ROM or replace the FCU Fax Error Codes The machine resets itself because of a fatal e fthisisfrequent update the ROM or replace the FCU communication error Snd msg in the manual task is all The user did the same operation many times and this 2 53 an e
64. These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from O to 10 Cnt O 1 O76 BICU 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 851 158 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Cvr Cnt 11 2076 BICU 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 861 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 11 to 20 Cnt 21 30 BICU 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 871 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 21 to 30 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 31 or higher Cnt 31 BICU 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 881 This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application Page Toner k Prev BICU 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 901 Page Toner Bottle BICU 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 891 This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application with the previously replaced units 159 160 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables e Page Toner k Prev2 BICU 0 to 99999999 0 1 This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application with the unit replaced before the previously replaced unit two steps back from the current unit O to 2147483647 0 1 001 Coverage BK These SPs display the total coverage percentage of sheets output by the machine 0 to 99999999 0 1 011 Covwerage P Bk These SPs display the total c
65. Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products The D067 D068 D069 D072 range of machines is the successor model to the B262 B292 B284 B288 range of machines If you have experience with the predecessor line the following information may be of help when you read this manual Differences from Predecessor Products Following controller options were added Controller Option HDD 80GB USB2 0 5D Slot Gigabit Ethernet 17ppm Memory copy Copying Speed l ppm l ppm ADF 1 to 1 2 Installation Se Installation Cautions A CAUTION Before installing an optional unit do the following cmm Print out all messages stored in the memory all user programmed items and a system parameter list e If there is a printer option on the machine print out all data in the printer buffer Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord the telephone line and the network cable 25 26 2 Installation Installation Requirements Environment Temperature and Humidity Chart Humidity 80 54 L Operation rang 11 7 8 MIN Temperature 10 C 27 32 50 80 6 89 6 b0461512 Temperature Range 10 C to 32 C 50 F to 89 6 F Humidity Range 15 to 80 RH Ambient Illumination Less than 1 500 lux Do not expose to direct sunlight Ventilation Room air should turn over at least 3 times hr person Ambient Dust Less than 0 1 mg m
66. URL2 is displayed on the Websys link page The name length is limited to 31 characters Web Link 2 URL Sets the URL referenced for URL2 linked to the Websys linked page The link name is limited to 127 characters Web Link 2 Visible Determines whether the link for URL2 is displayed on the Websys top page O to 1 1 1 1 Display No display 114 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 9832 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize then press When the execution ends cycle the machine off and on HDD Formatting IMH Format Thumbnail O Format Font Format Rec Mail Format Sed Mail Format User Info Format Job Log 0 Format DFU data Format All Log Format Ridoc I F 5840 IEEE 802 11 1 to 11 or 13 11 or 13 1 step Channel MAX Europe 1 to 13 default 13 NA Asia 1 to 11 default 11 Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via wireless LAN The number of channels available varies according to location The default settings are set for the maximum end ofthe range for each area Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels DFU Do not change the setting Lip 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables ltollor13 1 1 step Channel MIN CTL Europe 1 to 13 NA Asia 1 to 11 Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN The number of channels available varies according to location The default setting
67. a preset value determined by the country selected is used Default O Allowed Up to 16 alphanumeric characters This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer This setting dedicates the line to embedded RCG M only or sets the line for sharing between embedded RCG M and a fax unit Oor1 0 0 Line shared by embedded RCG M Fax 1 Line dedicated to embedded RCG M only If this setting is changed the copier must be cycled off and on e SP5816 187 determines whether the off hook button can be used to interrupt an embedded RCG M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction Modem Serial Number 179 This SP displays the serial number registered for the embedded RCG M Lmt MmReendnd 00 Cncl Normally it is best to allow unlimited time ML certification and ID2 update requests and for the notification that the certification has been completed However embedded RCG 174 M generates charges based on transmission time for the customer so a limitis placed upon the time allowed for these transactions If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time do this SP to cancel the time restriction RCG C M RCG CMDebuBISWDFEU 00 Bit SW RCG CMDebuBISWDFEU 00 107 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables FAX TX Priority This SP determines whether pushing the off hook button will interrupt an embedded RCG M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction This SP can be used
68. are environment friendly but no stronger than conventional cables These cables may be damaged in any of the following cases The cable is caught between hard objects such as brackets screws PCBs and exterior covers The cable is rubbed on a hard object such as brackets screws PCBs and exterior covers The cable is scratched with a hard object such as brackets screws PCBs exterior covers screwdrivers and fingernails 91 4 Replacement and Adjustment Special Tools and Lubricants A1849501 Optics Adjustment Tools 2 pcs set A2929500 Test Chart S5S 10 pcs set VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter Fluke 87 92 Exterior Covers and Operation Panel Exterior Covers and Operation Panel Rear Cover d068i102c 1 Open the right door A Interface cover B F x 1 Open the right door A Rear cover F x 5 KR O N Copy Tray A CAUTION Make sure that the cables under the copy tray are in place before reassembling the copier If these cables are caught between the copy tray and the inner cover they may be severely damaged 93 4 Replacement and Adjustment 1 Open front door A 2 Copy tray B 7 1 Reassembling There are several cables under the front end of the copy tray To set these cables in place gently pull these cables to the left hand side toward the PSU and hold them there as you attach the copy tray Scale Plate D067 only 1 Scal
69. board 40 SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 ASIC device error 284 connector error Loopback connector is connected but 110C C Centronic loopback connector check results in an error defective Replace the controller board Centronic loopback connector not connected correctly Centronic loopback connector is not 1120 C connected for detailed self diagnostic test Centronic loopback connector defective ASIC device defective Replace the controller board Self diagnostic Error Clock Generator Defective clock generator 838 A verify error occurred when setting e Defective 2C bus 2701 data was read from the clock generator via the 12C bus Defective I2C port on the CPU 1 Replace the controller board USB NAND Flash ROM error The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read e Defective i controller board 9101 The USB NAND Flash ROM is 1 Replace the i controller board disconnected Wireless card startup error The machine starts up gt The 9110 853 C IEEE802 11b card connection board cecoomzad gt Thewirelscs LAN Loose connection between the wireless d a ARE i card and the connection board card or bluetooth card is no recognized The machine has been reading the data from the card The machine 854 C loose connection between the wireless loses access to the card the wireless LAN card or bluetooth card car
70. data Controller SP5 801 xxx Scanner application Web service network application NCS R Fax DCS SP5 998 001 clears most of the settings and counters stored in the on the BICU the values return to their default values However the following settings are not cleared e SP5 807 Area Selection e SP5 811 001 Serial Num Input Code Set e SP5 811 003 Serial Num Input ID2 Code Display e SP5 812 001 Service TEL Telephone e SP5 812 002 Service TEL Facsimile SP5 907 Plug amp Play SP7 Data Log e SP8 History Use SP5 998 00 1 after you have replaced the BICU or when the BICU data is corrupted When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed When you have replaced the Exceptions 175 176 6 System Maintenance Reference controller NVRAM or when the controller NVRAM data is corrupted use SP5 801 001 The message is the same as the basic machine Memory Clear Procedure 1 Print out all SMC data lists V SMC Print Do SP5 998 001 Press the OK key Select Execute The messages Execute followed by Cancel and Execute are displayed Select Execute ge D gs oe When the program has ended normally the message Completed is displayed If the program has ended abnormally an error message is displayed 7 Turn the main switch off and on 8 Adjust the printer and scanner registration and magnifi
71. documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wrong e mail addresses for example Prints 1st page only 1 Prints all pages Text String for Return Receipt This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the transmission was received normally at the destination OO Dispatched Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt Receives the Return Receipt with dispatched in the 2nd part Disposition Automatic action MDN send automatically dispatched The dispatched string is included in the Subject string 01 Displayed Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt Receives the Return Receipt with displayed in the 2nd part Disposition Automatic action MDN send automatically displayed The displayed string is included in the Subject string 10 Reserved 11 Reserved A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to OO for dispatched received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error If any setting other than displayed 01 causes a problem change the setting to O1 to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt Media accept feature This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to confirm a reception O Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail 1 Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail Use this bit switch if a problem o
72. e _ 7508 Dsply O Jam History Displays the original jam history the most recent 10 jams Sample Display wt MM DATE Mon Mar 15 11 44 50 2000 where CODE is the SP7505 number see above 008 SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex TOTAL is the total error count SP7503 ast DATE is the date the jams occurred 7801 Memory Version PN Memory Version BICU 7801 2 Displays the version of the BICU board Printer Scanner 7801 15 Displays the version of the controller board 7803 Display PM Count 7803 1 Displays the PM counter 7804 Reset PM Counter 7804 1 Resets the PM counter SP7 803 001 When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed 195 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 7807 Reset SC Jam Counters Resets the SC paper original and total jam counters When the program ends normally 7807 1 the message Completed is displayed SP7 807 1 does not reset the following logs SP7 507 Display Paper Jam History and SP7 508 Display Original Jam History n Resets all counters except for the management counters The management counters are 7808 1 the counters that are not changed by Download SP5 825 001 gr Data Upload Download When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed 7810 Reset Key Op Code Resets the key operator code Use SP7 810 1 when the customer has forgotten the key operator code If the customer h
73. erroris detected while operatingthe Defective HDD HDD 1 Replace the HDD SD card authentication error 866 C yA digital license error of an SD card SD card data has corrupted application is detected 1 Store correct data in the SD card SD card error An application SD card is removed from the boot slot while an application An application SD card is ejected is activated SD card access error 13 to 3 File system error other number Device error SD card not inserted correctly SD card defective Controller board defective 868 For a file system error format the SD An error reportis sentfrom the SD card card on PC reader Fora device error turn the main switch off and on 3 Remove and re install the SD card Replace the SD card 5 Replace the controller AA SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 Address book data error The address book in the hard disk is accessed An error is detected in the address book data address book data is not read or data is not written e Data corruption into the address book amp Defective hard disk Defective controller software e Torecoverfromtheerror doany 1 Replace the hard disk the user codes of the following and counters are recovered when the countermeasures main switch is turned on if those data Format the address book by are stored in Smart Device Monitor for using SP5 846 050 all data in Admin the address book including the user codes and count
74. following 17 bytes Spaces are displayed as underscores _ Asterisks indicate that no DESS exists CERT Seri Num Displays serial number for the Remote certification Asterisks indicate that no DESS exists CERT Issuer Displays the common name of the issuer of the Remote certification CN the following 30 bytes Asterisks indicate that no DESS exists Select from the list the name of the country where embedded RCG M is installed in the machine After selecting the country you must also setthe following SP codes for embedded RCG M e SP5816 153 e SP5816 154 e SP5816 161 Japan 1 USA 2 Canada 3 UK 4 Germany 5 France 6 Italy 7 Netherlands 8 Belgium 9 Luxembourg 10 Spain CERT St ExpTime 093 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Aut Line Detect Press Execute Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG M is connected as either dial up or push type so embedded RCG M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside line The current progress success or failure of this execution can be displayed with SP38 16 152 e If the execution succeeded SP5816 153 will display the result for confirmation and SP5816 154 will display the telephone number for the connection to the outside line Line Detect Rst Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151 Here is a list of what the numbers mean Succe
75. g Q PGS count as two pages and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3 DLT counter SP is switched ON g Red Toner Remaining Applies to the wide format model A2 only This machine is under development and currently not available 143 144 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables SMC report printed with SP5990 All ofthe Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report we QNoe All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear These SPs count the pages scanned by each 8 192 C Total Scan PGS EX application that uses the scanner to scan 8 193 F Total Scan PGS mages 0 to 99999999 0 1 8195 S Total Scan PGS e SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages not the number of physical pages These counters do not count reading user stamp data or reading color charts to adjust color Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted Acountis done only after all images of a job have been scanned e Scans made in SP mode are not counted Examples System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 If 3 B5 pages and 1 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored the S count is 4 f both sides of 3 AA sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button in the Copy mode window the C count is 6 and the L count is 6 If both sides of 3 AA sheets are copied but not stored the C count
76. if RTN or PIN is received Hang up decision when a negative sede e TN 1 The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives RTN or PIN during G3 immediate transmission 0 No hang up 1 Hang up This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is Acceptable total error line ratio IF the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable being used Communication Switch 03 SP No 1 104 004 Bit Switches OO FF Hex times Maximum number of page retransmissions in a G3 memory This setting is not used if ECM is switched on transmission Default setting O3 H Communication Switch 09 SP No 1 104 010 FUNCTION COMMENTS Adjusts the interval of the I fax dialing Wt The interval of l fax dialing is calculated by following I Fax dial interval setting ormula Interval time specified value with this switch x 2 sec Communication Switch OA SP No 1 104 01 1 FUNCTION COMMENTS Point of resumption of memory The transmission begins from the page where transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time From the error page 1 Transmission begins from the first page using normal 1 From page 1 memory transmission Communication Switch OB Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch OC Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch OD SP No 1 104 01 4 267 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 OO to FF Hex
77. if error code O 21 is frequent When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set up data and sends CFR This Reconstruction time for the first line in is outside the T 30 recommendation But if this delay receive mode occurs set this bitto 1 to give the sending machine more time to send data 0 65 1 125 Refer to error code O 20 ITU T T 30 recommendation The first line should come within 5 s of CFR G3 Switch OB Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch OC Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch OD Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch OE SP No 1 105 015 Bit Switches Set CNG send time interval Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3 second CNG interval 3000 2250ms 3000 50xNms High order bit 3000 50 x Nms OF 3000 ms lt N lt FF 2250 OO OE 3000 3700ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms OF 3000 ms lt N OF 3700 ms Low order bit G3 Switch OF SP No 1 105 016 Alarm when an error occurred in Phase C or later If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error 1 n Disabled communication change this bit to 1 Enabled Alarm when the handset is off hook decada communication If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is off hook at the end of fax communication change this bit to 1 n O Disab
78. in place 5 Make sure the SD card is locked in place To remove the SD card push it in to unlock the spring lock and then release it so it pops out of the slot 6 Switch the main power switch on After about 5 seconds the LCD will display Please wait Then about 60 seconds later the LCD will display Program UpDate Menu P O1 on the first line and the name of the firmware on the second line e g System 168 Using SP Mode F SPF D068 D069 Program UpDate Menu P 01 Printer b867s502 7 Press the OK key to select a module To scroll through the menus press the or V keys A Program UpDate Menu P 01 ROM B1234567A NEW B1234567B 68675503 To view the firmware version press right key is the information on the current firmware NEW is the information on the firmware in the SD card To return to the menu press the lt key To select the module press the OK key scroll through the module name the serial number and the version press the key or P key e f you wish to install the following firmware simultaneously press the START key The scroll keys can be used to confirm that this firmware has been selected highlighted with a dark background Engine FCU Scanner Printer Printer Font Security Module Please note that the following firmware cannot be updated simultaneously The update procedure must be repeated for each individually
79. mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 are used for None 1 Text 1 2 Text 2 37 Photo 1 4 Photo 2 Scanner Color 0102 0 1 Selects which mode the setting of SP4 935 is used for None 1 Color Text 2 Color Photo Scanner Gray Scale Dor 1 0 Selects which mode the setting of SP4 936 is used for None 1 Gray Scale 76 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Scanner Gamma Selects text or photo as the priority output mode This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4 921 Notch Selection 4923 Selects the value of the center ID adjustment notch for the ID adjustment LEDs e Normally the center notch is range 1 5 If 1 is selected each notch shifts down becomes lighter If 1 is selected each notch shifts up becomes darker e This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4 921 Texture Removal Adjusts the texture removal level that is used with error diffusion O The default value for each mode is used Text 1 Photo 2 Special 2 and Special 5 have a default of 3 and Photo 1 3 have a default of 1 1 No removal applied 2 to 5 Removal applied at the level specified here The higher the setting level the less clear the image will become more texture removal This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 Line Width Adjusts the line width correction algorithm Positive settings produce thicker lines nega
80. most recent 10 service calls EN omm 7502 Counter Paper Jam 0 to 9999 1 step Displays the total number of copy paper jams 7503 Counter Orgn Jam 0 to 9999 1 step Displays the total number of original jams Paper Jam Loc 0 to 9999 1 step Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location 001 Paper jam occurs at power on Regist NoFeed OFF 010 Paper does not reach the registration sensor from a paper tray 1 Vertical SN OFF 011 Paper does not reach the relay sensor 12 E 1 Vertical SN ON 0 Paper is caught at the relay sensor 135 136 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Paper does not reach the registration sensor during reverse side printing for duplex printing Regist SN ON 070 Paper is caught at the registration sensor 1 Exit SN ON 120 Paper is caught at the exit sensor previous page Exit SIN OFF 12 Paper does not reach the exit sensor 2 Exit SN ON 122 Paper is caught at the exit sensor Dup Inverter OFF 123 Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor from the registration roller Dup Inverter ON 125 Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Original Jam Location Displays the total number of original jams by location These jams occur when the original does not activate the sensors Note Lag Jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed
81. of an original fed from the DF are scanned 8192 C Total Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals in copy mode Both sides are counted when 001 zs the front and reverse sides of an original fed from the DF are scanned 8195 S Total Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 1 sheet step 001 Displays the total number of scanned originals in scanner mode Both sides are counted when the front and reverse sides of an original fed from the DF are scanned 8221 ADF Org Feed 0 to 9999999 O 1 sheet step Front 001 Displays the total number of scanned front sides of originals fed from the DF 197 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Back 002 Displays the total number of scanned 2nd sides of originals fed from the DF 8381 T Total Prt PGS 0 to 9999999 O 1 sheet step Displays the print count of all application programs 8382 C Total Prt PGS O to 9999999 1 sheet step Displays the print count of the copier application program 8384 P Total Prt PGS 0 to 9999999 1 sheet step Displays the print count of the printer application program 8411 Prints Duplex 0 to 9999999 O 1 sheet step Displays the total count of the duplex printing 8422 C PHPGS Dup Comb O to 9999999 1 sheet step Simplex gt Duplex Duplex Duplex Simplex Combine Displays the total print count of copier application Buses Combine classified by combination duple type 84
82. only if SP58 16 164 is set to 00r 1 0 Disable Setting the fax unit off hook does not interrupt a fax transaction in progress If the off hook button is pushed during a embedded RCG M transmission the button must be pushed again to set the fax unit on hook after the embedded RCG M transmission has completed 1 Enable When embedded RCG M shares a line with a fax unit setting the fax unit off hook will interrupt a embedded RCG M transmission in progress and open the line for a fax transaction Polling Man Exc 200 Executes the polling test Instl Condition Displays a number that indicates the status of the G Remote service device Neither the registered device by the external RCG nor embedded RCG device is set 1 The embedded RCG device is being set Only Box registration is completed In this status the this unit cannot answer a polling request from the external RCG 2 The embedded RCG device is set In this status the external RCG unit cannot answer a polling request 3 The registered device by the external RCG is being set In this status the embedded RCG device cannot be set 4 The registered module by the external RCG has not started Instl ID 202 Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the embedded RCG Instl Reference 203 Executes the inquiry request to the Remote GateWay URL 108 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Instl Ref Rslt Displays a numb
83. position This SP specifies the offset from this base value 40152 Adjusts the distance of the white plate scan The scan begins from the start position SP4 015 001 and ends at the specified distance The base value is 2 0 mm This SP decides the offset from this base value Specify O zero or a larger value 4428 Scan Auto Adjustment Conducts the automatic scanner adjustment Use this SP after replacing the white plate Scanning in the section Replacement and Adjustment P 4450 Image Path E BK Offset Enable Dor 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path SH Path Enable Oor 1 0 7 1 step No 1 Yes 002 Uses or does not use the shading image path 180 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 4472 00 Adjusts the target black level for each signal These are used for offset adjustment in the SBU 4607 SBU Gain Target 4607 1 EVEN 4607 2 0 to 255 180 1 step 4607 3 Adjusts the target white level for each signal 4607 4 GREEN These are used for gain adjustment in the SBU 4607 5 BLUE 42000 Displays the result value of the offset adjustment in the 4628 SBU Gain Result 4628 1 EVEN 010 255 0 1 ste Displays the result value of the gain adjustmentin the SBU 4628 4 GREEN 4628 5 BLUE 181 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 4640 SBU Offset Loop 4640 1 EVEN 10 0 1 ste Display
84. printing fax messages and reports 2nd paper feed station usage for Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which fax printing has been specified by User Parameter Switch OF 15 O Enabled or which is used for the Specified Cassette Selection 1 Disabled feature Printer Switch 03 SP No 1 103 004 0 Incoming pages are printed without length reduction Length reduction of received data Page separation threshold Printer Switch 03 bits 4 to 7 Disabled 1 Incoming page length is reduced when printing 1 Enabled Maximum reducible length Printer Switches O4 bits O to 4 Page separation threshold with reduction disabled with switch 03 0 above Page separation setting when sub For example if this setting is set to 10 and A4 is the scan compression is forbidden selected paper size 0 15 mm IF the received document is 10 mm or less longer than AA Default 6 mm then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints IF the received document is 10 mm longer than AA then the document is split into 2 pages Printer Switch 04 SP No 1 103 005 26 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch O3 O above Maximum reducible length Paper length N x 5mm is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits to 4 For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper Maximum reducible lengt
85. that the user name and password settings are correct Direct SMTP destination incorrect Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem at the destination at that the settings at the destination are correct 14 04 Access to SMTP Server Denied SMTP server operating incorrectly 550 Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD on the server is full Insufficient free space on the HDD of the SMTP server Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the SMTP server HDD Insufficient free space on the HDD where the 14 05 SMTP Server HDD Full 452 destination folder is located Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the HDD where the target folder is located Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target destination for SMTP direct sending Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the target HDD The designated user does not exist 14 06 User Not Found on SMTP The designated user does not exist on the SMTP server Server 551 The designated address is not for use with direct SMTP sending 218 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed 4XX Data Send to SMTP Server Failed 5XX Authorization Failed for Sending to SMTP Server Addresses Exceeded Buffer Full Data Size Too Large Send Cancelled Security Locked File Error Mai
86. the receiving side IPFAX SWO06 uu Check whether the remote fax cancelled the Remote fax cancelled transmission o transmission Cannot receive by VolP Gateway LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection Cannot breach the firewall Request the remote Firewall NAT is installed fax to send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 232 IP Fax Troubleshooting 3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly Contact the network administrator VolP Gateway power switched on Contact the network administrator IP address host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP address Gateway correct on sender s side host name DNS server registered when host name uu Contact the network administrator specified on sender side Reauest the network administrator to increase the Network bandwidth too narrow q bandwidth D G3 fax connected Check that G3 fax is connected G3 fax power switched on Check that G3 fax is switched on Cannot receive by Alias Fax number LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection Cannot the breach firewall Request the remote fax Fi Il NAT is installed irewall to send by using another method Fax Internet Fax Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays this error code Gatekeeper installed correctly when the sender fax is a Ricoh model Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays
87. the scan resolution if possible Add optional page memory Wait for the files in the queue to be sent Delete unnecessary files from memory Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax machine ifthe machine s printer is busy or out of order Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk The job started normally but did not finish normally data may or may not have been received fully Restart the machine Fax Error Codes 22 04 The machine cannot store Update the ROM received data In the SAF Replace the FCU G3 t firmati 22 05 ING Defective FCU board or firmware answer 23 00 Data fae timeout during Restart the machine construction Replace the FCU The machine software resets Update the ROM 25 00 itself after a fatal transmission d Replace the FCU error occurre V 34 modem error Replace the FCU Update the SG3 modem ROM Replace the SG3 board F xx SG3 modem error e Check for line noise or other line problems Try communicating another V 8 V 34 fax 229 226 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 IFAX Troubleshooting e This section is used only for F SPF models 0068 0069 Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is causing the problem General LAN Between IFAX and PC Between machine and e mail server 1 Connection with the LAN 2 LAN activity 1 Network settings on t
88. the settings SP No 1 103 014 Printer Switch OE SP No 1 103 015 p jon a A paper size that has the same width as the aper size selection priority Width 1 Length received data is selected first 1 A paper size which has enough length to print all the received lines without reduction is selected first Paper size selected for printing A4 width fax data This switch determines which paper size is selected for printing A4 width fax data when the machine 0 8 5 x 11 si x has both A4 and 8 5 x 11 size paper 1 AA size 203 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 1 If all paper sizes in the machine require page Page separation separation to print a received fax message the O Enabled 1 Disabled machine does not print the message Substitute Reception is used After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette the machine automatically prints the fax message Printing the sample image on reports Same size means the sample image is printed at Bit 4 O Bit 3 The upper half only 100 even if page separation occurs Bit 4 Bit 3 1 50 reduction in sub User Parameter Switch 19 13H bit 4 must be set scan only to O to enable this switch Bit 4 1 Bit 3 Same size Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on Bit 4 1 Bit 3 1 Not used this feature Equalizing the reduction ratio among O When page separation has taken place all th
89. this error code Power to Gatekeeper switched on when the sender fax is a Ricoh model Request the sender to check the IP address host name IP address host name of Gatekeeper correct on the sender s side The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 2339 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Contact the network administrator DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host Q name specified on sender s side The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model Request the sender to check the settings User Parameter SW 34 Bit Enable H 323 SW is set to on Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh fax Local Local fax IP address registered IP address local fax IP address registered Register the IP address Local local fax Alias number registered Alias number local fax Alias number registered Register the Alias number Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth 10 Network bandwidth too narrow Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side IPFAX 5 06 transmission _ Check whether the remote fax cancelled the 11 Remote fax cancelled transmission Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays this error code Local fax registered in Gatekeeper when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 234 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only F
90. to 1 the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed 680508 if bit O 1 or 680538 if bit 2 1 tolerance for on or off state duration 75 and number of cycles required for detection coded as in address 680533 68050B if bit O 1 or 68053B if bit 2 1 on time hex code unit 20 ms 68050C if bit O 1 or 68053C if bit 2 1 off time hex code unit 20 ms Pulse dial parameters addresses 68054A to 68054F are the values for 10 pps If 20 pps is used the machine automatically compensates The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2 5 wavelengths after the time specified by this parameter The calculated level must be between O and 10 The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are High frequency tone e 0 5 x 552 680554 3 5 dBm NCU Parameters e 0 5 x N680555 dBm Low frequency tone e 0 5 x 3 80552 680554 N g0553 3 5 dBm e 0 5 0555 553 dBm e Nag0552 for example means value stored address 680552 6 68054A Europe Between Ds opening and Di opening France Between Ds closing and Di opening 68054D Europe Between Ds closing and Di closing France Between Ds opening and Di closing 7 Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz e g 800Hz tone for Al short protocol refer to the setting at 6805B5h Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz referto the setting at 6805B6h 8 68054A 68054D 68054E The actual in
91. to the hard disk and copies them to the SD Card A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card 125 126 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables HDD to SD Any 010 Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies itto the SD Card A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key specified Erase HDD Debug Data Erases all debug logs on the HDD Erase SD Debug 012 Erases SD debug logs in the SD card Turn off and on after executing this SP Dsply SD Space Displays the remaining space in the SD card SD to SD Latest Latest 4 MB Saves the debug log latest 4 MB in memory to the SD card A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD card Up to AMB can be copied to the SD card 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to the SD card Saves the specified debug log with SP5 857 006 in memory to the SD card A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD card Up to AMB can be copied to the SD card 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to the SD card SD to SD Any Latest 4 MB Any Key 015
92. up becomes darker This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4 921 T 1 tight 0 Normal 1 Dal 185 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Texture Removal Adjusts the texture removal level that is used with error diffusion The default value for each mode is used Text 1 Photo 2 Special 2 and Special 5 have a default of 3 and Photo 1 3 have a default of 6 1 No removal applied 2 6 Removal applied at the level specified here The higher the setting level the less clear the image will become more texture removal This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 Line Width Correction Adjusts the line width correction algorithm Positive settings produce thicker lines negative settings produce thinner lines This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 Independent Dot Erase Selects the dot erase level Higher settings provide greater erasure This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 92 1 pii ee This setting is only applied to the This setting is only applied to the originals 4931 Sharpness Solid 2 02 0 1 step Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to originals 186 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to the originals ion paar eid Selects the white line erase level None 1 Weak 2 Strong This setting is effective for all modes 0 W
93. was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V 34 phase 4 control channel start Up The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V 34 control channel restart The line was disconnected because the other terminal requested a data rate using MPh that was not available in the currently selected symbol rate Fax Error Codes e Check for line noise or other line problems f this error occurs the called terminal falls back to T 30 mode The guard timer expired while starting these phases Serious noise narrow bandwidth or low signal level can cause these errors If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal Try making a call at a later time Try using V 17 or a slower modem using dedicated tx parameters Try increasing the tx level Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting If these errors happen at the receiving terminal Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting Try increasing the tx level Try using V 17 or a slower modem if the same error is frequent when receiving from multiple senders The signal did not stop within 10 s Turn off the machine then turn it back on If the same error is frequent replace the FCU The signal did not stop within 10 s Turn off the machine then turn it back on If the same error is frequent replace the FCU The other terminal was incompatible Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer 213 214
94. which manvfacture is currently selected 5912 PCU Alarm Counter 255 45 1 step 5912 Specifies the PCU alarm level The PCU alarm is issued when the following condition is met PAc x 1000 gt PCUc where PAc is the value specified in this SP and PCUc is the PCU counter When you specify zero the PCU alarm is deactivated i Print Application Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take control of the O02 display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating because a key has not been pressed 3 to 30 3 1 second step im 13 132 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Selects which version of the Scan Router application program Light or Full Professional is installed 1 O 1 step Light version supplied with this machine 1 Full version optional Device Setting The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller Use this SP to enable and disable these features In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board these SP codes must be set to 1 0 02 0 1 step OFF 1 ON 2 ON Limited When the Function limitation is set On board NIC is limited only for the Remote or LDAP NT authentication On Board NIC Other network applications than Remote or LDAP NT authentication are not available when this SP is set to 2 Even if you can change the in
95. 05B9 PABX 2100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B9 dB 6805BD modem turn on level incoming signal 37 0 5N detection level dBm 6805BE to 6805 amp Not used E Do not change the settings Bits O to 3 Not used 6805C7 Bit 4 V 34 protocol dump O Simple 1 Detailed default Bits 5 to 7 Not used 6805C8 to 6805D9 Not used E Do not change the settings 6805DA T 30 TI timer 1 Maximum wait time for post message EOP EOM MPS can be changed to 30 6805E0 bit 5 Maximum wait time for post message 3 Change this bit to 1 if communication errors occur frequently during V 17 reception 299 300 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 RT 0 Low Bit 2 Bit 2 sets the level of the RT 1 High R i 6805E4 call signal Bit 3 sets the call signal impedance Bit 3 RZ Composite Bit O sets the ring Bit O 1 Fixe detection method Bit 1 If any setting is changed Use RDTP select a setting that is higher 6805E5 sets the ring detection REY than the default setting 1 Use RDTN Bits 2 to 7 Not used NOTES jp 2 If a setting is not required store FF in the address Italy and Belgium only RAM address 68055E the lower four bits have the following meaning Bit 2 1 International dial tone cadence detection enabled Belgium Bit 1 Not used Bit O 1 PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled Italy If bit or bit 2 is set
96. 1 Check and set the correct AT setting command SP5819 160 34 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions The supplied voltage is not sufficient due PP 9 1 Consult with the user s local telephone to the defective communication line or defective connection 005 C Incorrect dial up connection An unexpected error occurs when the modem RCG M tries to call the center with a dial up connection 1 No action required because this SC Program execution error does notinterfere with operation ofthe machine Engine startup error Just after the main power is turned on or the machine is recovering from auto off Poor connection between the BICU mode the engine ready signal assertion and controller board fails Defective BICU Just after the main power is turned on the Defective controller board engine does not respond Controller to operation panel communication error at startup Controller stalled Controller board installed incorrectly Defective controller board After powering on the machine Operation panel connector loose or communication between the controller defective and operation panel does not begin or P P 9 Poor connection of DIMM and the communication is interrupted after a optional boards on the controller board Check the setting of SP5875 001 If the setting is set to 1 OFF change it to ON normal startup SC Tables F SP
97. 1 sec n User Max Num Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack detection functions 50 to 200 200 1 users Password Max Num Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password attack detection functions 50 to 200 200 1 passwords 89 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Monitor Interval 003 Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password information 1 to 10 3 1 sec Permissible Num Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive number of attempts are detected for MFP features O to 500 100 1 Attack Detect Time Sets the length of time for monitoring the frequency of access to MFP features to 30 10 1 Cert Waite Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected 0 to 9 3 1 sec Attack Max Num Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected 50 to 200 200 1 attempt These settings should be done with the System Administrator Note These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy applications O to 1 0 1 90 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Determine
98. 1 to 9999 Alarm goes off when the PM counter reaches the specified value 1 to 9999 x 1000 Oorl 1 002 ADF No alarm sounds 1 Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing through the A R DF gt 10 000 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level document misfeeds are not included Oto3 3 1 step Zero Off 1 Low 2 5K jams 2 Medium 3K jams 3 High 6K jams 5505 Error Alarm Sets the error alarm level The error alarm counter counts 1 when any SC is detected However the error alarm counter decreases by 1 when any SC is not detected during specified sheets of copies for example default 1500 sheets The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches 5 O to 255 10 100 copies per step v3 94 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Paper Size 0 Off 1 On Toner 0 Off 1 On 005 Drum Off 1 On Toner is replaced default O80 Toner Call Timing 1 Toner near end or end Interval Others Interval A3 Interval A4 Interval A5 250 to 10000 1000 1 step Interval B5 Interval DLT Interval 1 001 Enables disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam 002 Enables disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams 003 Enables disables initiating a call when the front door remains open 011 Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam This setting is enabled
99. 2 x 11 USB 2 0 interface Ethernet interface 1 OOBASE TX OBASE T USB 2 0 interface Interface IEEE1284 Ethernet interface 1OOBASE TX IEEE802 11a g Wireless LAN 10BASE T option Gigabit Ethernat option Network protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 IPX SPX AppleTalk RHPP PJL PCL5e XL Printer language Host Based Printing RPCS Adobe PS3 PDF option PCL 45 fonts 13 International fonts PCL option Resident Fonts OCR Barcode Adobe PS3 PDF 136 fonts Summary 4 Arial Specifications Windows 2000 XP Server Operating systems supported 2003 Vista Server2008 by this machine 8 6 to 9 MacOSX10 1 or later 1 OOBASE TX 1 OBASE T shielded twisted pair STP Category Required network cable Type5 cable Gigabit Ethernet Category cable Scanner Basie 0067 0072 BRE Sgen Approx 18 pages minute Scan Scan Size A4 SEF compression size AASEF Colors Gradations Resolution 200 dpi Binary Resolution 200 E di ITU T No 1 Chart Select device data compression Full Color 9 pages Binary Halftone Data Scan Size A4 SEF compression compression level3 Resolution 200 dpi Document feeder ARDF ITU T ISO JIS SCID N5 Chart d iles Less than 900 W consumption Image sensor type CCD Image Sensor Ethernet interface 1 OBASE T or 1 0OBASE TX USB interface Interface Ethernet interface 1OBASE T or IEEE1284 IEEE
100. 22 to the large connector at the front center of the PSU 18 Screw the ground wire 23 to the PSU bracket with the included grounding screw 19 Attach the clamps 24 to the PSU bracket 20 Attach the heater harness though the clamps 21 Position the harness so that the front clamp is between the two bindings 25 on the harness 22 Fasten the clamps 23 Pull the excess lenath of the heater s harness out the openina at the rear Be sure that the harness passes on the side of the grounding plate at the bottom of the opening The front of the grounding plate must remain clear 24 Arrange the excess harness length so that it sits beneath the FCU cover plate 25 Attach the caution decals to the locations shown in the illustration 48 Paper Tray Unit Heater b0461523 26 Reassemble the copier 27 Plug in the power cord and check the operation 49 2 Installation ARDF B872 This procedure explains how to install the ARDF for the Basic model D067 Accessory Check CORE ee 5 Left Scale Guide b872i101a Installation Procedure ACAUTION e Unplug the main machine s power cord before starting the following procedure 50 ARDF B872 b8721501 1 Unpack the ARDF and remove the packing tape from the bottom of the ARDF body d068i102c 2 Open the right door A 3 Remove the interface cover B F x 1 and rear cover P x 5 51 2 Instal
101. 302 ervice POS EE ESSE 1 Appendix Specifications Specifications Copier Copy Process Laser beam scanning and electro photographic printing Maximum Original Size A4 8 5 x 14 AA 8 5 x 14 ARDF Maximum AA SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF Copier s paper tray AA SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF Bypass AA SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF Optional paper tray AA SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF Duplex Minimum Copy Paper Size A5 LEF 81 5 x 51 2 LEF Copier s paper tray SEF 8 5 x 51 2 Bypass AA SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF Optional paper tray unit AA SEF 81 2 x 11 SEF Duplex Custom sizes in the bypass tray Width 90 216 mm 3 5 8 5 Length 139 600mm 5 48 23 62 Standard paper tray optional paper tray 60 90 g m 16 24 lb Copy Paper Weight Bypass 60 157 g m 16 42 lb Duplex 64 90 g m 20 24 lb 1 Appendix Specifications ome Dome 200 155 Enlargement 141 129 Reproduction Ratios 100 100 Maximum 900 W or less EU 1000 W or less F SPF D068 D069 35 W or less Basic 0067 0072 25 W or less Energy Saver Power Consumption F SPF D068 D069 W or less Sleep Mode Basic DO67 D072 None F SPF D068 D069 None Basic D067 D072 1 W or less Operating copier only Copier 485 x 450 x 371 mm 19 4 x 18 x 14 8 Dimensions W x D x HJ With optional paper tray
102. 4 Attempted dial up overseas without the correct 2385 international prefix for the telephone number 2387 Not supported at the Service Center Database out of service 2389 2390 Program out of service 239 Two registrations for same device Error Caused by 2392 Parameter error Response from GW URL 2393 External RCG not managed 2394 Releases a machine from its embedded RCG setup Device not managed Instl Clear 209 110 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Print Com Log 250 Prints the communication log 5821 Address Sets the IP address of the RCG Remote Communication Gate destination for call processing at the remote service 002 RCG IP Address center 00000000h to FFFFFFFFh 1 step 5824 NVRAM Upload 5824 1 NVRAM Upload Download in this section 5825 NVRAM Download 5825 1 8 NVRAM Upload Download in this section Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility 1284 Compatibility Centro O or 1 1 1 step O Disabled 1 Enabled Enables disables Job Spooling 5 Job Spooling O0r1 0 1 step O Disabled 1 Enabled Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power on Job Spooling Clear Start Time ON Data is cleared 1 OFF Automatically printed Enables or disables ECP Compatibility Dor 1 17 1 step 052 ECP Centro O Disabled 1 Enabled NOTE This SP is activated only when SP5 828
103. 41 T PrtPGS Ppr Size 8442 C PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8444 S PrtPGS Ppr Size 198 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 002 A4 Displays the number of pages printed by each copier __ ja _ 8451 C PrtPGS Ppr Tray O to 9999999 1 sheet step Displays the total print count classified by paper source 0 to 9999999 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages printed by each copier 8522 C PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 step O07 Le The SP counts by finishing mode the total number of pages or printed by the Copy application 199 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Input Check SP5 803 Conducting Input Check 1 Select SP5 803 2 Select the number see the table below corresponding to the component 3 Select Execute The copy mode is activated 4 The sign or is displayed see the table below Input Check Table 001 Safety SW Open Closed 003 Right Cover SW Closed Upper Relay S Paper detected Not detected 007 Lower Relay S Paper detected Not detected Regist Sensor Paper detected Not detected Exit Sensor Paper detected Not detected 011 Duplex Inverter S Paper detected Not detected 014 By pass PES Paper detected Not detected 016 Upper PES Paper detected Not detected O17 BK Upper PES Paper detected Not detected O20 BK Lower PES Paper detected Not detected O27 PCU Set Signal Installed Not i
104. 50 is set to 1 w 111 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each protocol O Validates 1 Invalidates bitO LPR bit T FIP bit2 IPP bit3 SMB bit4 BMLinkS bit5 DIPRINT bit Reserved bit7 Reserved Job Spooling Protocol Enables or disables the Telnet protocol TELNET 0 OFF 1 ON 0o0r1 1 O Disable 1 Enable Enables or disables the Web operation Web 0 OFF 1 ON Oorl 1 O Disable 1 Enable Active IPv Link This is the IPv local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 1 1b in the format Link Local Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total of 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 147 Active IPv Status Address 1 These SPs are the IPv status addresses 1 to 5 referenced 149 Active IPv Status Address 2 on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 1 15b in the format Active IPv Status Address Status Address Prefix Length Sane a desse i The address consists of a total of 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each Active IPv Status Address 5 112 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 IPv Manual Address 00 Manual Seting Address 00 Address This SP is the manually set address referenced on Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 1 1b 156 in the format Manual Set Address Prefix Length The IPv6 addre
105. 55 255 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan Router This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without 004 reference to the DNS setting 118 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Deli Svr Model 0 04 0 11 step Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by I O device Unknown 1 SG1 Provided 2 SG1 Package 3 SG2 Provided 4 SG2 Package Deli Svr Capabty 0 255 1 step Bit7 1 Comment information exits Bit 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible 010 Bit4 1 Address book automatic update function exists Changesthe capabiliiver ihe Bit3 1 Fax RX delivery function exists server that is registered as an I O device Bit2 1 Sender password function exists Bit 1 Function to link MK 1 user and Sender exists 1 Sender specification required if set to 1 Bit is set to O Delivery Svr Cap Ext 010255 1 step Changes the capability of the server that is registered as an I O device 11 Bit7 1 Address book usage limitation Limitation for each authorized user Bit 1 RDH authorization link 0 Bit5 to O Not used 013 Specifies the scheme of the primary delivery server 014 Specifies the port number of the primary delivery server OLS Specities the URL path of the primary delivery server 01
106. 6 Specifies the scheme of the secondary delivery server 119 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Rmus 017 Specifies the port number of the secondary delivery server mre 018 Oorl 1 O Disable 1 Enable Instant Trans Off Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending Provides items for delivery server settings Machine ID DelSvy Displays ID Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory The value is only displayed and cannot be changed This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI The ID is displayed as either 6 byle or 8 byte binary MC ID Clr DelSvy Clears ID Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable After clearing the ID the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle If a value smaller than the present value is set the UCS managed data is cleared and the data excluding user code information is displayed Delsvr Rtry Tmer 0 255 1 step Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book Delsvr Rtry Tmes 255 1 step Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book
107. 78 4 174 5 1 2 Adjust the smooth level This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 None 1 Level 1 to 7 Level 7 Brightness 0 to 255 128 1 step Adjust the brightness level This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 007 Adjust the contrast level This setting is only activated for specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 ion ben D Selects the white line erase level None 1 Weak 2 Strong This setting is effective for all modes e O White line erase is not used and white level correction is used instead This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4 921 Selects the black line erase level This setting is effective only when originals are scanned by the DF 0 No 1 Very weak 2 Weak 3 Strong This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4 921 SP5 XXX Mode 5001 All Indicators On Turns on all LEDs The LCDs turn on and off every 3 seconds Press the reset key to end this program 5024 mm inch Selection 8 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display After selecting the number you must turn the main power switch off and on Europe Asia model 0 mm 1 inch American model 0 mm 1 inch 5045 According Counter Displays the num
108. 8 442 146 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 F Scan PGS Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 443 S Scan PGS Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 445 010 Full Bleed eee These SPs count the number of pages printed 8 383 F Total PHPGS by the customer The counter for the application used for storing the pages 8 384 P Total PrtPGS increments a 99999999 0 1 8 387 O Total PrtPGS When the A3 DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104 1 A3 DLT page is counted as 2 THIS 147 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables When several documents are merged for a print job the number of pages stored is counted for the application that stored them These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine so the following pages are not counted as printed pages Blank pages in a duplex printing job Blank pages inserted as document covers chapter title sheets and slip sheets Reports printed to confirm counts All reports done in the service mode service summaries engine maintenance reports etc Test prints for machine image adjustment
109. 9 SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 HDD Encryption unit error 2 959 A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit No HDD installed Unformatted HDD HDD check error The encryption key on the controller is The HDD is not correctly installed different from the one on the HDD Install the HDD correctly Initialize the HDD P failure during the dat ower a wc i Power failure during the data encryption The data encryption and HDD has not been completed encryption Initialize the HDD Data read write error The DMAC error is detected twice or Same as SC863 more m O EL HDD Initialization error HDD not initialized 860 The controller detects that the hard disk Defective HDD fails 1 Reformat the HDD 1 Replace the HDD Bad sector number error Defective HDD 1 Format the HDD with SP5 832 002 2 Replace the HDD 862 The number of bad sectors in the HDD image data area goes over 101 HDD Read error Defective HDD 863 The data stored in the HDD cannot be Defective controller read correctly 1 Replace the HDD 2 Replace the controller 43 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions HDD CRC error 864 While reading data from the HDD or Defective HDD C storing data in the HDD data 1 Replace the HDD transmission fails HDD Access error 805 C An
110. 99 0 1 8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application F PrtPGS FIN 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 523 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print P PrtPGS FIN 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 524 application S PrtPGS FIN 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application ECC KENNEN If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling the unstapled pages are still counted The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray so jam recoveries are counted 153 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables This SP counts the total output broken down by color output regardless of the application used In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine 8 591 1 A3 DIT These SPs countthe totals for A3 DLT paper use number of duplex pages printed and the number of staples used 8 5912 These totals are for Other O applications only 8 601 1 Cvg BW Displays the total coverage of each mode 8 601 11 Cvg BW Pages Displays the number of the printouts in each mode m TT m
111. Ask the administrator to check 2 E mail server Send a test e mail with the machine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is performed successfully Make sure that the PC can log into the e mail server 1 E mail account on Check that the account and password stored in the Server the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to check Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send receive e mail Between e mail server Ask the administrator to check and internet 2 E mail server Send a test e mail with the machine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is performed successfully Make sure that the e mail address is actually 3 Destination e mail used address Check that the e mail address contains no incorrect characters such as spaces Use the ping command to contact the router Between e mail server Check that other devices connected to the router Router settings and internet can sent data over the router Ask the administrator of the server to check 22 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Check whether e mail can be sent to another Error message by e address on the same network using the Between e mail server application e mail software mail from the network of and intern
112. Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration 190 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 StoS Front Regist 75 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 6006 1 Adjusts the side to side registration for the front side of the original for ARDF mode Use the 9 key to select or before entering the value 006 2 Adjusts the leading edge registration for ARDF mode Use the 9 key to select or before entering the value a 006 3 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ARDF mode Use key to select or before entering the value S to S Rear Regist 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts side to side registration for the 2nd side of the original for ARDF mode Use the 9 key to select or before entering the value Sub scan Magnif 0 9 to 0 9 0 0 0 1 step 6006 5 6 6 6 Adjusts the sub scan magnification for the ARDF Origin Curl Adj 0 No 1 Yes 006 Turns on or off the skew correction at 2nd side scanning This SP is activated only when the 6 duplex mode is selected 006 7 Adjusts the original buckle for the skew correction at 2ns side scanning This SP is activated only when SP6 006 006 is set to 1 Yes 6009 ADF Free Run 6009 1 6 Performs an ARDF free run in duplex scanning mode Press ON to start press OFF to stop 009 3 Performs an ARDF free run at simplex scanning mode Press ON to sta
113. Bit 3 Hungarian Bit 4 Polish Bit15 Portuguese Bit16 Russian Bit17 Traditional Chinese Bit18 Simplified Chinese Bit19 Hangul 68001 8 H Total program checksum low 680019 H Total program checksum high 680020 to 68003F H System bit switches 680050 to 68005F H Printer bit switches 680060 to 68007F H Communication bit switches 680080 to 68008F H G3 bit switches 680090 to 68009F H G3 2 bit switches Not used 6800A0 to 6800AF H G3 3 bit switches Not used 6800DO0 H User parameter switch OO SWUER_OO Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch O1 SWUSR 01 Not used 6800D2 H User parameter switch 02 SWUSR 02 Bit Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages OFF 1 ON Print Bit 1 Center mark printing on received copies 211 312 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 This switch is not printed on the user parameter list OFF 1 ON Print Bit 2 Reception time printing This switch is not printed on the user parameter list OFF 1 ON Print Bit 3 TSI print on received messages OFF 1 ON Print Bit 4 Checkered mark printing This switch is not printed on the user parameter list OFF 1 ON Print Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Not used 6800D3 H User parameter switch 03 SWUSR 03 Automatic report printout Bit O Transmission result report memory transmissions O Off 1 On Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 M
114. D sensor dirty for the ID sensor 979 is applied Drum not get charged light Vt 4 5V or SP2 221 5 Vt TD sensor defective Vt lt O 2V Using SP Mode Basic D067 D072 187 6 System Maintenance Reference Fax Service Tables Only For D068 D069 See b bue for the information e 3 2 D D O C U Q Q 3 9 oO Q O Q 2 C T m 2 B 3 C e ron O AZ z gt om oe C 188 January 2009 oubject to change TABLE OF CONTENTS MM aaa 1 Appendix Specifications POPS CU PN RR gt SL E E A E E E EA E A E 5 ARR mm com 8 Med 7 jl E E 10 7115 E 14 Poper ay V 2m 14 Supported Paper 16 Original Paper SS 16 FM Ms siete scan E E 17 2 Appendix Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables na AENEAN STREE E DEEE 21 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions SC TablesdF 29 SIMI 23
115. Do not install the machine where it will be exposed to direct sunlight or to direct airflow from a fan air conditioner air cleaner etc Do not install the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gas Place the machine on a firm and level base Do not install the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibration Machine Level Within 5 mm 0 2 of level Front to back Installation Requirements Wil Sm 02e Minimum Operational Space Requirements Place the machine near the power source providing clearance as shown E F b262i130 A Front 750 mm 29 6 B Left 100 mm 3 9 C Rear 100 mm 3 9 D Right 100 mm 3 9 E Depth 450 mm 17 7 F Width 485 mm 19 1 e The 750 mm front space indicated above is sufficient to allow the paper tray to be pulled out Additional space is required to allow an operator to stand at the front of the machine 27 28 2 Installation e Actual minimum space requirement for left rear and right sides is 10mm 0 4 each but note that this will not allow room for opening of the bypass tray right door platen cover or ARDF unit Power Requirements A NCAUTION Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible After completing installation make sure the plug fits firmly into the outlet Avoid multiple connections to the same power outlet e Be sure to ground the machine
116. E aioe il imi jc We a jT gma 6 a a y e Yo e d068r022 Release the hooks and then pull out the rails A 12 Remove the DIMM B if it has been installed When replacing the controller board remove the NVRAMs from the board Install the NVRAMs to the new board 130 BICU and Controller Board When replacing the NVRAM on the controller board Spi 5 Wii Burt D 7 mm d068r023 1 When you replace make sure that the is correctly installed 2 The mark B on the NVRAM should be directed to the down side seem from the back side of the machine 3 Reassemble the machine 4 Copy old data to the new with SP5 825 or input the ome data in the oo When Installing the Printer Scanner Unit D468 Refer to procedure Controller Board F SPF models D068 D069 in this section and carry out the steps without step 3 131 4 Replacement and Adjustment Other Replacements Duplex Motor b130r928 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Duplex motor A x 1 P x 2 132 Other Replacements High Voltage Power Supply Board b130r924 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 High voltage power supply board A all EP P x A e Remove the insulating sheet B if you are going to remove the contact release solenoid Contact Release Solenoid or the gear cover ii Paper Fe
117. Engine SC Code Descriptions trente tette tnnt tinere nnne tnn 24 OWSC Code 92 SC BascrDOS X DOT 49 ERN T 49 Engine SC Code Descrip 50 4 Appendix Electrical Component Defects HecmncalComponeni Delet NIE E E 59 En E a E A EE 59 Blown Fuse Conii Teee a a E tet 60 BICU LED Display EEEE 61 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables System Service Mode F SPF DO68 D069 cccccesesesesessssesescsesesseseseseseecseseseseseeesesesesesecseseseseseseeseass 63 US TIN e ese T 63 m m 161 DT O O A 163 Printer Service 6 6 cce nicer ne 165 Scanner Program Mode Table et 170 System Service Mode Basie DOG7 DO 72 costis oett testi 172 Service Mode Tables cccccccccsscssssssssscsesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssesssussessessesssussssseusesssesseasesseessasseaes 172 hs 105 200 Check D 201 Printer Service Program Mode Table ccccccsssesesesessesesesesseseseseceseseseseeseseseceesesesecseseseeecseseeecseseeeeeesesees 203 Scanner Program Mode Table sse tenen 203 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide
118. F D068 D069 SC8xx A Possible Cause Countermeasure Thisisafile detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot e OS Flash ROM date detective 817 change the controller firmware diagnostic module system kernel or loader attempts to read the self root system files from the OS Flash SD card data defective use another ROM orthe items on the SD card in the SD card controller slot are false or corrupted Kernel stop Due to a control error a RAM overflow occurred during system processing One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel HAIC P2 error System program defective 07664 VM Talbestor Optional board defective 1 Replace controller firmware 554C USB error Self Diagnostic Error CPU e 0001 001 5 O00A 000D Detailed error code Defective CPU device During the boot monitor program and Defective boot monitor program or self self diagnostic any exception or cut nodon in are not supposed to happen If fese happen itis deined as S6 Replace the controller board Reinstall the system firmware 39 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Defective CPU Defective local bus Cache access error in the CPU Turn the main power switch off and on Reinstall the system program Replace the controller board 0601 0602 0605 0606 0607 0609 Detailed error code Exceptional command does not s Decore
119. G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine the setting mail cannot negotiate between terminals the mm inch selection is determined by the sender fax When this switch is Off O Images scanned in inches are sent in inches Images scanned in mm are sent in mm Images received in inches are transmitted in inches Images received in mm are transmitted in mm When this switch is On 1 Images scanned in inches are sent in inches Images scanned in mm are converted to inches Images received in inches are transmitted in inches Images received in mm are converted to inches l fax Switch 02 SP No 1 102 003 FUNCTION COMMENTS This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e mails when they are received O Prints only text mail 1 Prints mail header information attached to text mail When a text mail is received with this switch On 1 the From address and Subject address are printed as header information When a mail with only binary data is received a TIFF F file for example this setting is ignored and no header is printed 255 256 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Output from Attached Document at E mail TX Error This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e mail attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs This allows the customer to see which
120. L 8 631 This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number F FAX TX PGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 633 This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number e Ifa document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color Atthe present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are the same The counts include error pages e f a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each destination Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not Relay memory and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination 154 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 T IFAX TX PGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using Fax F IFAX TX PGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I Fax e Ifa document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color Atthe present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same The counts include error pages e f a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each destination Pol
121. Not used 6801FC to 680207 H The second subscriber number ISDN G4 Not used 680208 to 68021B H PSTN 1 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII See the following note 68021C to 68022F H PSTN 2 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 680230 to 680246 H PSTN 3 RTI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 680247 to 680286 H TTI 1 Max 64 characters ASCII See the following note 680287 to 6802C6 H TT 2 Max 64 characters ASCII Not used 6802C7 to 680306 H TTI 3 Max 64 characters ASCII Not used 680307 to 68031A H PSTN 1 CSI Max 20 characters ASCII 68031B to 68032E H PSTN 2 CSI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 68032F to 680342 H PSTN 3 CSI Max 20 characters ASCII Not used 680343 H Number of PSTN 1 CSI characters Hex 680344 H Number of PSTN 2 CSI characters Hex Not used 680345 H Number of PSTN 3 CSI characters Hex Not used 317 318 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Ifthe number of characters is less than the maximum 20 for RTI 64 for TTI add a stop code 00 after the last character 680370 H ID for transmission and reception Read only Do not change the settings 680374 to 680375 H Envelopment ID for the envelopment reception BCD 680380 to 680387 H Last power off time Read only 680380 H 01 H 24 hour clock 12 hour clock AM 02 H 12 hour clock PM 680381 H Year BCD 680382 H Month
122. Only For D068 D069 Cannot send via VoIP Gateway Dr MENU DII NANI Is the IP add host fth ified s the IP address host name of the specifie Check the IP address host name Gateway correct Number of the specified fax correct Check the remote fax number Fi is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using irewa is installe another method Fax Internet Fax Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported DIT END NN Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth Raise the network delay level IPFAX SW 01 Bit O to 14 Network bandwidth too narrow IP Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed Set IP Fax SWOO Bit 6 to 1 Cannot send by Alias Fax number LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 230 IP Fax Troubleshooting Confirm the Alias of the remote fax Error Code 13 14 p Firewall NAT installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using irewa installed Number of specified Alias fax correct 2 3 another method Fax Internet Fax DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host o Contact the network administrator name specified Check the settings Enable H 323 SW is set to on See User Parameter SW 34 Bit O IP address of local fax registered Register the IP address of the local fax Alias number of local fax registered Register the Alias number of the local fax Remote fax registered in Gate
123. Or Overload main motor remains out of its operation speed for 0 7 second after reaching the Defective main motor operation speed Defective thermistor The fusing temperature remains lower than Incorrect installation of the thermistor the specified temperature by 20 degrees Celsius Defective power supply unit Loose connectors Fusing temperature warm up error The fusing temperature rises 7 degrees or Defective thermistor less in two seconds and this continues 5 Incorrect installation of the thermistor times consecutively Or the fusing temperature is not detected within 25 or 35 Defective fusing lamp seconds Defective power supply unit 54 Fusing overheat error 1 The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor is 230 C or higher for one second Fusing overheat error 2 The fusing temperature detected by the monitor circuit is 250 C or higher for one second Fusing lamp overheat error After the fusing temperature reaches the target the fusing lamp remains on for 12 seconds Unstable fusing temperature While the fusing lamp is on the fusing temperature varies 50 C or more within one second and this occurs two consecutive times SC Tables Basic D067 D072 Defective thermistor Defective power supply unit Defective thermistor Defective power supply unit Defective thermistor Incorrect installation of the thermistor Defective power supply unit Defecti
124. P Mode Tables Fusing Temp Adj 1105 Adjusts the target fusing temperature Note that the thermistor is at the center of the hot roller 1105 9 Thick Center 140 to 185 165 1 C step Display Fusing 1106 1 Center Displays the fusing temperature Fusing Soft Start DFU Adjusts the number of zero cross cycles of the fusing lamp AC supply needed to bring the fusing lamp powerto 10076 while bringing the lamp up to the standby temperature or while copying Increase this value if the machine is experiencing sudden power dropouts 11071 Warm Up Soft Start 0 10 times 1 20 times 2 50 times 1107 2 Other Soft Start 0 10 times 1 20 times 2 50 times 3 1 time 1107 3 Soft Stop Setting 0 No 1 Yes auo Set Fusing Start 0 15 1 1 5s 2 25 1108 1 Specifies interval for fusing temperature control System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 o Nip Band Check Conducts the nip band check Adjusting Nip Band in the section Replacement and Adjustment Fan Control Timer 30 to 60 30 1 s step Specifies the fan control time The fan motor keeps its operating speed for the specified time before changing the speed or stopping The fan control timer prevents the exhaust fan from suddenly stopping This function protects the copier from overheating Enables or disables consecutive jam detection at the fusing unit If this SP is setto 1 default consecut
125. P1 911 001 and you select Thick Paper as the paper type of the by pass tray gt System Settings gt Tray Paper Settings gt Paper Type Bypass Tray SP2 XXX Drum 2001 CR Bias Adj 2100101500 16807 V s 2001 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for printing The voltage changes automatically as charge roller voltage control works The value here is the base value for the charge roller voltage control System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 ID sensor pattern 0 to 400 300 1 V step Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for the ID sensor pattern as part of charge roller voltage correction The charge roller voltage is obtained by adding SP2 001 002 to the value of SP2 001 001 Adjusts the width of the erased area ii Adjusting Copy 2101 Erase Margin Adj Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 0 0 to 9 0 3 0 0 1 mm step 2101 1 Leading Edge Specification 2 1 5 mm 0 0 to 9 0 4 0 0 1 mm step Trailing Edge 21012 Specification 2 2 5 1 5 mm The rear trailing edge is this value plus 1 2 mm 0 0 to 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step Left side 21013 Specification 2 1 5 mm The rear left edge is this value plus 0 3 mm 0 0 to 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step Right side 21014 Specification 2 2 5 1 5 mm The rear right edge is this value plus 0 3 mm 2201 Dv Bias Adj 2201 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for printing Im
126. Pero Moli e E E UT Heal Salely INS 1 Observance of Electrical Safety Standards sse LIMO amp TET 1 Safe and Ecological 2 Ko lo E Ee aid UEM Ix MU ELM ee 2 Symbols and ADbDbreviallofis sese tritus rete E Eiai 3 1 Product Information Fera o2 11 Machine eire Tro NETTE l2 NMamnrome Bade DO 2M 12 NambdmerZSPEDOSS DOGOO9 18 System Components For 0068 7 2069 14 Gl eL E A edad cee ecco 16 CCOmpoHent Layon iee NUR tI Ug DE ener a et ee ern tr I ME 16 Elecirical oie A een uiuere 18 Melo el E E 2 POS COUN 22 Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products sse 24 2 Installation msala on Orel NN OO m 29 ioi eu oda esae te pietas antera vise dtes uctus Festa bep e oca 26 wore e NR 26 Machine E 9 26 Minimum Operational Space Requirement ccccceccssssesssseseseesesesceseseeseseeesesees
127. Printing in this section e To adjust scanning use the A4 test chart Adjusting Registration 1 Place the test chart on the exposure glass Make sure that the test chart is aligned with the rear and left scales on the exposure glass 151 4 Replacement and Adjustment 2 Make a copy B lt b130r935 3 Measure the distance between the leading edge of the image area and the leading edge of the paper A e The diagram shows the paper on the copy tray Note that the paper is output with the face down 4 Adjust the leading edge scan registration SP4 010 001 M _ 5 Measure the distance between the side edge of the image area and the side edge of the paper B 6 Adjust the side to side registration SPA O1 1 001 152 Adjusting Copy Image Area Adjusting Magnification A lt lt b130r938 lt b130r940 1 Place the test chart on the exposure glass Make sure the test chart is aligned with the rear and left scales on the exposure glass Make a copy Compare copy with the original 4 Adjust the main scan and sub scan magnifications The original image A is magnified in the main scan direction B or in the sub scan direction C when you specify a larger value The diagrams show the paper on the copy tray Note that the paper is output with the face down SP4 009 001 Main Sc
128. WUSR_06 Not used 6800D7 H User parameter switch O7 SWUSR 07 Bits O and 1 Not used Bit 2 Parallel memory transmission O Off 1 On Bits 3 to 7 Not used 6800D8 H User parameter switch O8 SWUSR 08 Bits O and 1 Not used Bit 2 Authorized reception Only faxes from senders whose RTIs CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted 1 Only faxes from senders whose RTIs CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted Bits 3 to 7 Not used 6800D9 H User parameter switch O9 SWUSR 09 Not used 6800DA H User parameter switch 10 SWUSR OA Bits O to 2 Not used Bit 3 Page reduction Off 1 On Bits 4 and 5 Not used Bit 6 Use both e mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results O Off 1 On Bit 7 Not used 6800DB H User parameter switch 11 SWUSR OB Bits and 1 Not used Bit 2 White original detection O Off 1 On alarm and alert message on the LCD Bits 3 and 4 Not used Bit 6 Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station O Off 1 On 314 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Bit 7 Not used 6800DC H User parameter switch 12 SWUSR_OC Not used 6800DD H User parameter switch 13 SWUSR_OD Not used 6800DE H User parameter switch 14 SWUSR_OE Bit Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode On 1 Off Bit 1 Maximum document length detection O Double letter
129. age density becomes higher when you specify a smaller value a greater absolute value Image density becomes lower when you specify a greater value a smaller absolute value 2 LL 220 V 1 1 260 V 0 300 V 1 H 340 V 2 HH 380 V ID sensor pattern 952 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for the ID sensor pattern The voltage applied is obtained by adding SP2 201 002 to SP2 201 1 The setting affects ID sensor pattern density which in turn affects the toner supply 175 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 2213 Outputs After NE 0 50 pages 1 20 sheets Sets the number of copy print fax pages that can be made after toner near end has been detected Reduce the number of pages if the user normally makes copies with a high image ratio 2214 Develpr Initialize Initializes the TD sensor toner supply target voltage and the TD sensor gain value Execute this SP replacing the developer or the TD sensor ID Error Analysis ID Sensor Error Analysis SP2 221 T etis 222 5 Displays the Vt value 22216 Displays the Vts value 2301 Tr Current Adj i Image Transfer Current 2 1 2 020pA 1 2 2 ormai paper uA 2301 1 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from a paper tray Use a high setting if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper within spec from a paper tray Thick Special 27 4pA 12
130. ail attachment as B4 Original width of e mail attachment A3 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A3 Designates the bits to reference for original size of The O selection default references the settings for Bits OO e mail attachments 01 02 above The 1 selection ignores the selections of Bits O Registered Bit O to 6 00 02 1 No registration Switch 02 FUNCTION COMMENTS Line resolution of e mail attachment 200 x 100 0 Of Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 200 x100 1 On Line resolution of e mail attachment 200 x 200 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 200 x 200 308 Dedicated Transmission Parameters Line resolution of e mail attachment 200 x 400 0 Off 1 On Line resolution of e mail attachment 400 x 400 Off Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 200 x 400 Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 400 x 400 1 On Designates the bits to reference for original size of The selection default references the settings for Bits OO e mail attachments 01 02 04 above The 1 selection ignores the selections of O Registered Bit O to 6 Bits OO O1 02 04 1 No registration Switch O3 Not used do not change the settings Switch 04 If the other ends have the addresses which have the full mode function flag O this machi
131. al and paper size decal to the paper tray 25 Install optional units if any 00681108 26 Attach the ferrite core P to the network cable when connecting the cable 27 Attach the ferrite core to the telephone line in the same manner as step 26 only for D068 D069 28 Connect the telephone line to the LINE jack only for 0068 0069 The end of the ferrite core must be about 10 cm 4 from the end of the cable 29 Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch 34 Copier 30 Select the language used in the operation panel as necessary gt Language For D068 D069 Interface settings DO68 1 Start the SP mode 2 Select SP5 985 001 NIC setting and change the setting value to O OFF 3 Select SP5 985 002 USB setting and change the setting value to OFF 4 Turn the main switch off and on D069 1 Start the SP mode 2 Select SP5 985 001 NIC setting and change the setting value to 1 ON 3 Select SP5 985 002 USB setting and change the setting value to 1 ON 4 Turn the main switch off and on For 0068 0069 Copier settings 1 Start the SP mode Select SP5 801 001 and execute the initialization 2 3 Exit the SP mode and then start the UP mode 4 5 Exit the UP mode and then start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 870 003 and execute initialization for Remote 7 Select SP5 907 001 and specify the Plug amp Play 8 Select SP5 870 001 an
132. ale upper right cover Bi Operation Panel and Upper Covers 100 Scanner Unit b262r507 b130r907 4 Scanner motor B F x 3 1 spring 3 screw holders EB x 1 Reinstalling When reinstalling fasten the screws loosely set the spring in place and tighten up the screws 101 4 Replacement and Adjustment Scanner HP Sensor b262r506 1 Rear cover Rear Cover Front left cover S Operation Panel and Upper Covers Scale plate Scale Plate Scanner HP sensor A x 1 hook Move the first scanner from the home position if you have difficulty removing the sensor Scanner Alignment Adjustment 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Rear scale upper right cover front left cover operation panel Vf Operation Panel and Upper Covers 3 Exposure glass Exposure Class 4 Loosen the 2 screws holding the 1st and 2nd scanner belts in place 102 Scanner Unit 5 Slide the 1st and 2nd scanners so that all four of the following are roughly aligned on both the front am and back sides The hole in the copier s lid The hole in the 1st scanner The right corner hole in the 2nd scanner The hole at the base of the scanner 6 Insert the two optics adjustment tools A and adjust the scanners as necessary so that the tools go through all four holes 7 Tighten the two screws that you loosened at step 2 above so that the belts are firmly clamped
133. an Mag 1 0 SP4 008 001 Sub Scan Mag 1 0 Scan Auto Adjustment This procedure adjusts the standard white density level Adjust the standard white density after any of the following maintenance work Replacing the standard white plate Replacing the BICU 153 4 Replacement and Adjustment Replacing the lens block e Executing the memory clear SP5 801 002 basic model SP5 998 001 other models Place 10 sheets of new A4 paper on the exposure glass Close the platen cover Activate the SP mode Select Copy SP4 428 Specify 1 and press the OK key The copier automatically adjusts the standard white density DF Image Adjustment i e Perform the adjustment procedure in this section only when the ARDF is installed on the copier 1 Make a temporary test chart as shown in the above diagram Use the A4 8 5 x 11 paper to make it 2 Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF 3 Make a copy lt b130r941 4 Measure the distance between the side edge of the image area and the side edge of the paper A 154 Adjusting Copy Image Area The diagram shows the paper on the copy tray Note that the paper is output with the face down Adjust the side to side registration S to S Front Regist SP6 006 001 S to S Rear Regist SP6 006 004 The image area moves to the rear side of the copier when you specify a larger value 6 Measure th
134. as forgotten the key operator code a new one can be 7810 1 specified by using User Tools System Settings Key Operator Tools Key Operator Code On gt Enter Key Operator Code When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed if the program ends abnormally an error message is displayed 7832 Display Self Diag Displays the SC codes and the number of their occurrences Each number is in the range 7832 1 of 9999 Dsply Info Count 7991 ae isplays the total operating time or the total number of operations The time is displayed in the following format day hour minute second Dsply Timer Count 7791 The total of the time when the main switch is kept on excluding the time when the safety switch is off Dsply ID S Work 7991 3 The total of the time when the ID sensor is working Dsply Dev Counter 7991 4 The total number of paper outputs 196 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 Dsply ID Er Count 991 5 The total number of ID sensor errors 7992 Reset Info Count Reset Timer Count 7992 Clears the timer counter SP7 99 1 001 Reset Dev Count 9924 Clears the development counter SP7 99 1 004 Reset ID Er Count 7992 5 Clears the ID sensor error counter SP7 99 1 005 SP8 XXX History T Total Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals Both sides are counted when the front and reverse sides
135. ber of the installed counter 2 1 step Counter Method O 1 counter Total 1 2 counters Total and Prints 2 2 counters GPC Displays or does not display the IP address on the LCD O01 Display IP address CIL 0o0r1 0 No Not display 1 Yes Display Displays or does not display coverage counter the LCD O01 Coverage Counter CTL 0or1 0 O Not display 1 Display 5062 Part Replacement Displays or does not display the PCU yield on the LCD Dor 1 0 O Not display 1 Display CN 82 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Displays or does not display the PM part button on the LCD 0or1 0 O Not display 1 Display 5067 Part Replacement Ope Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for PCU 001 PCU CTL 1 0 Service 1 User 5113 Optional Counter Type This program specifies the counter type 0 None 1 Key card 3 4 001 Opt Cnt Type 1 CTL 2 Key card down 3 to 10 Japan only 11 Exp Key card 12 Exp Key card Deduct This program specifies the external counter type 0 None 002 Opt Cnt Type 2 CIL 1 Expansion Device type 1 2 Expansion Device type 2 3 Expansion Device type 3 0 Not installed 1 Installed scanning accounting MF Key Card Ext Japan use 5118 Disable Copying 0 Not disabled 1 Disabled This program disables copying PM Parts Display Optional Counter F
136. both sides simultaneously the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning With an ADF ARDF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear side scanning e When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1 e occurs during the job recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting Also the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output 8 281 T TScan PGS TWAIN TScan PGS TWAIN These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions 0 to 99999999 0 1 Atthe present time these counters S Scan PGS TWAIN perform identical counts 8 291 T Scan PGS St m e Thee Shs covet the nubere pag 8 293 F Scan PGS Stamp stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit Oto 99999999 0 8 295 S Scan PGS Stamp uve T Scan PGS Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 441 C Scan PGS Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP
137. can be downloaded 14 5 UCS Destination Download The address book was being edited Error The numberfor the specified destination does not exist it was deleted or edited after the job was created The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the 14 60 Send Cancel Failed send operation Notification Mail Send Failed for All Destinations 14 6 All addresses for return notification mail failed 14 62 Transmission Error due to the When the line page exists in received pages with G3 existence of zero line page communication the transmission is interrupted At startup the system detected that the IP address of the POP3 IMAPA server has not been registered in the machine POP3 IMAPA Server Not 15 01 Registered POP3 IMAPA Mail Account The POP3 IMAPA mail account has not been Information Not Registered registered 15 03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered 15 10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15 11 to 15 18 The DNS or POP3 IMAPA server could not be found The IP address for DNS or POP3 IMAPA server is not Connection Error stored in the machine 15 02 15 11 The DNS IP address is not registered Network not operating correctly POP3 IMAPA send authorization failed Incorrect IFAX user name or password 15 12 Authorization Error Access was attempted by another device such as the PC POP3 IMAPA settings incorrect
138. cation Copy Adjustment in the chapter Replacement and Adjustment 9 Refer to the SMC lists and enter any values that differ from the factory settings Double check the values for SP4 901 10 Adjust the standard white level SP4 428 11 Initialize the TD sensor SP 2 214 12 Check the copy quality and the paper path Machine No Setting SP5 81 1 001 Specifying Characters SP5 81 1 001 specifies the serial number For the machine with the optional controller you use the numeric keypad and the optional operation panel GW Machine You can use the numeric keypad to type numbers In addition you can use the operation panel to type other characters When you press the ABC key the letter changes as follows A gt B gt C To input the same letter two times for example AA you press the ABC key the Space key and the ABC key To switch between uppercase letters and lowercase letters press the Shift key Using SP Mode F SPF D068 D069 Serial Number and NVRAM Serial numbers are stored in the NVRAM before shipment and are not cleared You must specify a serial number after you replace the NVRAM SMC Print SP5 990 SP5 990 outputs machine status lists 1 Select SP5 990 2 Select a menu e GW machine 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report O06 Non Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Net File Log 021 Copier Use
139. ccurs when the machine receives an answer mail which contains the media accept feature field Bit Switches Image Resolution of RX Text Mail This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail 0 200 x 200 1 400 x 400 The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to have enough SAF Store and Forward memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution l fax Switch 03 Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 004 l fax Switch 04 SP No 1 102 005 FUNCTION COMMENTS Subject for Delivery TX Memory Transfer This setting determines whether the RTI CSI registered on this machine or the RTI CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents Puts the RTI CSI of the originator in the Subject line If this is used either the RTI or CSI is used Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line 1 Puts the RTI CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC the information in the Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine automatically the destination folder for each e mail O Standard subject 1 Mail post database subject The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three cases 1 When the service technician sets the service software switch 2 When memory sending deliv
140. characters Original size Maximum or 11 x 17 DLT Standard A3 297mm x 432mm Maximum scanning size Irregular 297mm x 1200mm Recommended T 38 Annex protocol TCP UDP IP communication Compatible machines IP Fax compatible machines Specify IP address and send fax to an IP Fax compatible fax through a Scan line density IP Fax transmission network function Also capable of sending fax from a fax connected to the public telephone lines via a VolP gateway Receive a fax sent from an IP Fax compatible fax through a network IP Fax reception function Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected the public telephone lines via a VolP gateway Fax Unit Configuration _ Standard for B284 288 Handset Type 1018 B433 EN NA only Common with PG C1 1 Appendix Specifications ARDF A4 to A5 8 x 14 to 8 5 x 51 5 Custom Width 139 mm to 216 mm Simplex Length 139 mm to 1260 mm Original Size Custom Width 139 mm to 216 mm Duplex Length 160 mm to 356 mm 1 When you use 310 mm or more originals originals weighing 55k 17 lb 64 g m or less cannot be used in duplex scanning mode Original Weight 52 105 g m 14 28 lb Table Capacity 50 sheets 80 g m2 21 Ib Reproduction Range 50 200 Operating 50 W or less On standby 1 2 W or less Dimensions W x D x H 485 x 360 x 120 mm 19 1 x 14 2 x 4 72 4 9 kg 10 8 Ib excl
141. cond 5844 Sets the speed for USB data transmission Full Speed Auto Change 002 Sets the vendor ID Initial Setting OxO5A Ricoh Company to OxFFFF 1 DFU Vy 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 003 Sets the product ID 0 0000 to OxFFFF 1 DFU Sets the device release number of the BCD binary coded decimal display 0000 to 9999 1 DFU Enter as a decimal number NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized as the BCD 5845 Provides items for delivery server settings FTP Port Num 010 65535 3670 1 step 001 Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server Srv IP Primary Range 000 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 255 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address The IP address under the transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting Retry Interval 50 to 999 300 1 second step Specities the interval time for sending the scanned image data to the deliver server or SMTP FTP NCP SMB server after sending error Specifies the retry times for sending the scanned image data to the deliver server or SMTP FTP NCP SMB server after sending error DeliErr DispTime 0 to 999 300 1 second step Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device Svr IP Secondary Range 000 000 000 000 to 255 255 2
142. cs housing unit The optics housing unit does not become Defective software ready within 17 seconds after a request Controller engine inconsistency One ofthe following controllers is installed to the basic model The controller of the MFP model The controller of the copier facsimile model The controller of the printer scanner The controller is incompatible with the copier model engine The controller of the optional printer scanner is installed to one of the following models The MFP model The copier facsimile model The printer scanner copier model NVRAM error Defective NVRAM Loose connection between the BICU An error occurs during engine NVRAM and the NVRAM check 981 Incorrect installation of the NVRAM Defective BICU 31 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Localization setting not specified The main power switch is turned on for the The localization information in the firsttime aferthe NVRAM is nonvolatile ROM and in the NVRAM is replaced different 8 SP5 807 001 e Incorrect localization setting Defective NVRAM Defective controller Defective BICU Print images are not transferred Loose connection between the controller and the BICU GW SC Code Descriptions SC xx MF accounting device error 1 The machine sends a data frame No Defective or broken line between normal end signal returns This machine a
143. ctive LD unit Defective BICU 390 Laser synchronization error 322 The BICU detects the TD sensor outputting extraordinary voltage less than 0 2 V or e Defective TD sensor more than 4 0 V 10 times consecutively loose connection of the PCU The polling module detects a current leak loose connection of the PCU of the development bias Defective high voltage supply board Developer initialization error 392 Development bias leak 391 Defective ID sensor Insufficient developer Defective drum operation The ID sensor does not detect a correct pattern during developer initialization a Defective development roller 2 214 001 operation Loose connection of the PCU Insufficient voltage for the charge roller 93 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Defective high voltage supply board Loose connection of the PCU The feedback voltage of the transfer roller V DE Incorrect installation of the transfer is insufficient unit or the separation unit Defective transfer roller Transfer roller leak error positive electrode 401 Defective high voltage supply board Loose connection of the PCU The feedback voltage of the transfer roller D Incorrect installation of the transfer is insufficient unit or the separation unit Defective transfer roller Transfer roller leak error negative electrode 402 Main motor error The main motor does not reach its operation speed withinO 7 second
144. cts the transmit timing 2 1 step 217 Timing O No Transmit 1 Transmit one by one 2 Transmit periodically 5849 Displays or prints the installation date of the machine The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or pol Display Inst Date Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter 002 Print or 1 1 1 step O Off No Print 1 On Print the total counter when the installation date is registered to the machine 5851 5851 Bluetooth Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit Press Mode either key O Public 1 Private System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Remote ROM Update 5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when updating the remote ROM 1 1 step O02 Local Port Disallow 1 Allow ON OFF OFF 1 ON Switches the debug log feature on and off The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on Target 2 HDD 3 SD Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated 210 3 1 2 HDD 3 SD Card Save to HDD Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk Save to SD Card Specifies the debug log number for saving to an SD card HDD to SD Card Latest Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written
145. d SMTP Aut Direct Set 0Dor1 0 Selects the authentication method for SMPT Bit switch Bit 0 LOGIN Bit 1 PLAIN Bit 2 CRAM MD5 Bit 3 DIGEST MD5 Bit 4 to 7 Not used This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode S MINE Header 00r1 0 O Enabled 1 Disabled Enables or disables the E mail alert function ES Add Date Field 00r1 0 O0 Not add 1 Add 005 Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail 128 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 5869 5869 RAM Disk Setting 0Oor1 0 Mail Function GWINIT 0 0 ON 1 OFF Turns on or off the e mail function 5870 5870 Common Key Info Writing Writes to flash ROM the common proof for Writing wee FM validating the device for Remote specifications F ts th f f the flash ROM 5873 5873 50 Card Appli Move Move E This SP copies the application programs from the original SD card in SD card slot 3 to an SD card in SD card slot 2 This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in the SD Card Slot 3 to the original SD card in the SD 002 Undo Exec card slot 2 Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec SP5873 1 5875 5875 sc Auto Reboot Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs Dor1 0 The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the
146. d do not change these settings System Switch 1B SP No 1 101 028 In this switch setting there is a limitation Do not select the same image quality in two modes e g these setting combination is not allowed Bit1 O Bit O 1 Text Bit3 O Bit 2 0 Photo Diffusion Bit 6 O Bit 5 O Bit 4 Text Image Quality in Text mode This setting determines the desirable scanning image Bit 1 O Bit Text Sharp quality when the text mode is selected with the Bit 1 0 Bit 0 1 Text operation panel Image Quality in Photo mode This setting determines the desirable scanning image Bit 3 O Bit 2 O Photo Diffusion quality when the photo mode is selected with the Bit 3 O Bit 2 1 Photo Dithering operation panel e This setting determines the desirable scanning image Image Quality in Special Original de quality when the special original mode is selected with mo the operation panel eje e e o fe 1 o Pa a DIERENC T 73 fe fe bert pet _ System Switch 1C Not used do not change these settings System Switch 1D SP No 1 101 030 251 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 RTI CSI CPS code display O RTI CSI CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the O Enable LCD panel during communication 1 Disable 1 Codes are switched off no display Destination telephone number T When 1 is selected the destination telephone number displa
147. d 1 Check the line connection Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer The other terminal did not reply settings to NSS A in Al short protocol The other terminal may not be compatible mode Cross reference Dedicated tx parameters Section 4 The other terminal sent a DCS which contained functions that Check the protocol dump list the receiving machine cannot Ask the other party to contact the manvfacturer handle The data reception not ECM is Check the line connection not completed within 10 The other terminal may have a defective modem minutes NCU FCU 211 212 Polarity changed during communication FCU does not detect the SG3 The stored message data exceeds the capacity of the mailbox in the SG3 The communication mode specified in CM JM was not available V 8 calling and called terminal The calling terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect ANSam after sending CI The called terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect a CM in response to ANSam ANSam timeout The calling terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect a JM in response to CM CM timeout The called terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect a CJ in response to JM JM timeout 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Check the line connection Retry communication FCU firmware or board d
148. d and the connection board connection board is still recognized 4 42 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Wireless card error 855 Some illegal data is found in the card Defective wireless card Wireless card connection board error An error is detected in the wireless 856 C e Defective wireless card connection LAN card or bluetooth card connection board USB I F Error 857 Defective controller 1 Check the USB connections and make USB interface error is detected sure that they are securely connected 2 Replace the controller board HDD Encryption unit error A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit Encryption key acquisition error Defective controller board The controller fails to get a new Replace the controller board encryption key Encryption key setting for HDD error The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD NVRAM data encryption error 1 An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted NVRAM data encryption error 2 An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted Other error A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted Defective SATA chip on the controller board Replace the controller board Defective NVRAM on the controller board Replace the NVRAM Defective controller board Replace the controller board Same as SC9
149. d by the card save function Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact Card Save SD has Add and New menu items Card Save Add Appends files to the SD Card Does not overwrite existing files If the card becomes full or if all file names are used an error will be displayed on the operation panel Subsequent jobs will not be stored e Card Save New Overwrites files in the card s prt cardsave directory Limitation Card Save cannot be used with Status Readback commands PJL Status Readbacks will not work In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail Procedure 1 Turn the main power switch OFF 2 Insert the SD card into the service slot of the controller board Then turn the power ON To determine which slot is the service slot please see the service manual Enter SP mode Select Printer SP Select Service Mode and press OK button Select 1 001 Bit Switch and press OK button Be xm de e 159 5 Troubleshooting 160 PRINTER Class 1 001 Bit Switch d068t102 Press OK button again 1 001 001 Bit Switch 1 7 00000000 0 10 00000000 d068t103 Use the numeric key A to turn bit 4 ON The result should look like 00010000 By doing this Card Save option will appear in List Test Print 1 001 001 Bit Switch 1 1 001 001 Bit Switch 1 7 00000000 0 10 7 00010000 0 10 00000000
150. d execute writing certification for Remote S 9 Select SP5 302 002 and specify the time zone Select SP5 307 001 003 and 004 and specify the daylight saving time settings 11 Exit the SP mode and turn the main switch off and on 12 Start the UP mode 13 Specify the date and time with Set Date or Set Time User Tool gt System Settings gt Set Date or Set Time 14 Turn the main switch off and on 15 Check the operations 39 2 Installation 16 Make a full size copy and check if the side to side and leading edge registrations are correct If they are not adjust the registrations For D068 D069 Fax Settings Initializing the Fax unit When you press the Fax key for the first time after installation the error SRAM problem occurred SRAM was formatted will show on the LCD for initializing the program of the fax unit Turn the main power switch off on to clear the error display e f another error occurs after initialization this can be a functional problem 1 Select fax SP1 101 016 and specify the country code 2 Select fax SP3 101 001 and specify the service station Optional Handset Only for D068 D069 Accessory Check Check that you have the components and accessories Handset cradle mE e The handset bracket is not included in the optional handset kit The bracket is provided as an accessory of the copier 36 Copier b130i908 Installation Procedu
151. d handle against front of paper drawer as screws are tightened to ensure there is ensure the smallest gap between back of handle and front of paper drawer Put the paper tray back into the machine Printer Scanner Unit Printer Scanner Unit This procedure explains how to install the printer Scanner unit for the basic models 0067 0072 Accessory Check Screw M3 x Controller Box Printer Panel NA 15 Printer Panel EU 27 4 Multi function Panel Security Reference 15 Quick Reference Printer Guide 15 27 Quick Reference Scanner Guide 15 27 CD ROM Printer 15 CD ROM Scanner 15 27 Interface Cover FCC Decal 15 Ferrite Core Installation Procedure 67 2 Installation 00681908 Installation Procedure ANCAUTION e Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure d068i102a 68 OO N Printer Scanner Unit Open the right door A Remove the interface cover 2 x 1 Remove the rear cover C x 5 Remove the bracket D at the rear left frame of the mainframe amp x 2 Remove the scanner upper left cover E d067i927 Cut the opening F on the rear cover This opening is for the network interfaces and the SD card slot and the LAN cable Do not cut the topmost opening C B b892i902c Install the ground plate A x 2 Insert the upper and lower hook
152. d insert it into the card slot 2 4 Press down the power switch on the operation panel and hold it and turn on the main power switch COPY 5 827 001 Program Download 5 Press the Execute key D The program starts running 180 Using SP Mode Basic D067 D072 COPY 5 827 001 Program Download Load Status sk ok e ke n 6 Do nottouch any key while the message Load Status is displayed This message indicates that the program is running COPY CIass3 5 827 001 Program Download End Sum k k kH 0 20 EXP 7 Check that the message End Sum is displayed This message indicates that the program has ended normally 8 Turn off the main power switch 9 Remove the flash memory card 10 Attach the interface cover 11 Turn the main power switch on and check the operation Test Pattern Print SP5 902 001 Executing Test Pattern Printing Specify the pattern number and press the OK key 2 Press the copy start key The copy mode is activated i Using SP and SSP Modes in this section 3 Specify copy settings and press the key 4 To return to the SP mode press the 9 key Test Patterns Test Patterns Using VCU 181 182 6 System Maintenance Reference Dc NEN DCN o amea Test Patterns Using IPU ee Using SP Mode Basic D067 D072 Ie a TC HN a oa 7 ommata ejm ooo s DPI POT HEN ICON owen zo
153. d068r026 FCU A P x 4 EB x 1 When you replace the FCU board remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board Set the correct date and time with the User Tools User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Set Date Time 137 4 Replacement and Adjustment Do not turn off the battery switch SW e Do SP6 101 in the Fax SP to print the system parameters and check the settings 138 Laser Unit Laser Unit A WARNING Turn off the main power switch and unplug the copier before starting replacement The laser beam can damage your eyes severely ACAUTION Do not touch the screws on the LD board on the LD unit Do not try to adjust any part of the LD unit The LD unit is precision adjusted before shipment Do not touch the polygon mirror shield glass or lenses with your bare hands Location of the Caution Decal CAUTION VORSICHT CAUTION CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEN STRAHL AUSSETZEN Laser Unit 1 PSU assembly V PSU 2 Toner bottle holder 3 Laser unit A P x 3 EB x 2 Reassembling 139 4 Replacement and Adjustment Make sure that the cable B passes under the unit LD Unit and Polygon Mirror Motor B Yo J 1 Laser unit Laser Unit 2 Laser unit cover A P x 2 1
154. data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded saved NVRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded saved to the same SD card 7 Turn off the main power and then remove the SD card from the slot 2 8 Reassemble the machine Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM Follow this procedure to download save SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine f the SD card with the data is damaged or if the connection between the controller and BICU is defective the NVRAM data download may fail If the download fails repeat the download procedure Ifthe second attempt fails enter the data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM data S above procedure 166 Using SP Mode F SPF D068 D069 1 Turn off the main power of the copier 2 Remove the interface cover 2 F x 1 3 Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into the service slot 2 4 Turn on the main power of the copier 5 Execute SP 5825 1 NVRAM Data Download and press the Execute key 6 Turn off the main power of the copier and then remove the SD card from the slot 2 7 Reassemble the machine In order for the data to download successfully the serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine If the serial numbers do not match the download will fail This procedure downloads saves the following data to the
155. de menu is displayed about seconds Selecting Programs When a blinking underscore or several blinking underscores is displayed you can type a number from the numeric keypad D e When the sign 4 OK A is displayed upper right corner you can scroll through the menu by pressing the left arrow key B or the right arrow key C To select program press the OK key F Specifying Values 1 After locating a program press the OK key A blinking underscore or several blinking underscores indicates which value you can change The value in parentheses is the default value of the menu 2 Type a necessary value from the numeric keypad To switch between positive plus and negative minus values press the 9 key 3 To validate the value press the OK key To cancel the value press the escape key E Activating Copy Mode You can activate the copy mode while the SP mode is running When you do so the copier outputs images or patterns that help you adjust the SP setting 1 Press the key The copy mode is activated 2 Specify copy settings and press the key 3 To return to the SP mode press the key i e You cannot end the SP mode while the copy mode is activated Quitting Programs Ending S SP Mode Press the key or the escape key to quit the program You can end the SP mode by pressing one of these keys several times Conventions used in the tables e Asterisk The setti
156. devices TLB 1 Replace the controller board 4002 4005 Detailed error code The calculation error in the CPU Defective CPU Occurs 1 Replace the CPU 821 Sel Diagnostic Error ASIC ASIC error 0B00 The write amp verify check error has e Defective controller board occurred in the ASIC 1 Replace the controller ASIC not detected OBO6 ASIC controller board defective Poor connection between North Bridge The ASIC of the I O is not detected and PCI I F Replace controller board 37 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Timer error between ASIC and CPU System firmware problem The CPU checks if the ASIC timer Defective RAM DIMM 0005 works properly compared with the Deleoive controller CPU timer If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range this SC code is displayed 1 Replace the RAM DIMM e Reinstall the controller system firmware 2 Replace the controller board Video bridge device ASIC error 1 Defective F between the video bridge SOA 1 The CPU does not detect the video device and i controller bridge device 1 Replace the i controller Video bridge device ASIC register error 1 50A2 The CPU detects the video bridge Defective I F between the video device but detects error data from the bridge device and i controller video bridge device 1 Replace the i controller Self diagnostic error HDD Hard Disk Drive XXXX Detailed error code
157. e roller for about 20 seconds 8 Wait until the OHP sheet is output 9 Press the 9 key 10 Make sure SP1 109 001 is selected 11 Specify O 12 Press the OK key 13 Quit the SP mode You see an opaque stripe on the OHP sheet This is the trace of the nip band The normal nip band is symmetrical on the OHP sheet Both ends are slightly thicker than the center There are no specifications or standards for the nip band of this copier 110 PCU and Quenching Lamp PCU and Quenching Lamp When handling the photo conductor unit PCU use caution Do nottouch the OPC drum with your bare hands When the OPC drum is unclean clean it with dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton and wipe it with dry cloth e Do not use alcohol or any other chemicals to clean OPC drum These substances damage the OPC drum surface Keep PCUs in a cool dry place Do not expose the OPC to any corrosive gas such as ammonia Do not shake a used PCU Remaining toner and developer may spill out e Dispose of used PCUs in accordance with local regulations PCU w prd BA A A b130r952 1 Open the right door i e The PCU may become stuck if you try to remove it while the front door is closed 2 Open the front door 3 Remove the toner bottle holder i e Clean all spilled toner off the toner bottle area and the inside of the front door 4 Pull out the PCU A 82 x 1 5 When having installed a n
158. e separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio Page Separation 1 Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place i Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction Printer Switch OF SP No 1 103 016 Smoothing feature Bit 1 O Bit 0 O Disabled 0 0 0 1 Disable smoothing if the machine receives Bit 1 O Bit O 1 Disabled halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines Bit 1 1 Bit O O Enabled frequently Bit 1 1 BitO 1 Not used Communication Switches Communication Switch 00 SP No 1 104 001 264 Bit Switches Compression modes available in receive mode Bit 1 O Bit O O MH only Bit 1 O Bit O 1 MH MR Bit 1 1 BitO O MH MR MMR Bit 1 1 BitO 1 MH MR MMR JBIG Compression modes available in transmit mode Bit 3 O Bit 2 0 MH only These bits determine the compression capabilities to be 2 3 Bit 3 O Bit 2 1 MH MR used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B Bit 3 1 Bit 2 0 MH MR MMR handshaking of the T 30 protocol Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 MH MR MMR These bits determine the compression capabilities to be declared in phase B handshaking of the T 30 protocol JBIG JBIG compression method Reception Change the setting when communication problems occur Only basic supported l using JBIG compression 1 Basic and optional both supported JBIG com
159. e usual SC history is updated e f a problem involves circuit boards see if you can solve the problem by disconnecting and reconnecting all connectors before deciding to replace a circuit board e Ifa problem involves a motor lock check the mechanical load before deciding to replace a motor or Sensor e If working on a fax equipped machine switching power off and on may cause loss of data stored the memory 49 50 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Engine SC Code Descriptions Exposure Lamp Error The scanner has scanned the white plate but cannot detect the white level The scanner home position sensor does not detect the scanner leaving the home position The scanner home position sensor does not detect the scanner coming back to the home position Defective exposure lamp Defective exposure lamp stabilizer Defective exposure lamp connector Unclean scanner mirror Scanner mirror out of position Defective SBU board Defective SBU connector Lens block out of position Incorrect position or width of white plate scanning i SP4 01 5 Defective scanner home position sensor Defective scanner drive motor Defective scanner home position sensor connector Defective scanner drive motor connector Defective BICU board Defective scanner home position sensor Defective scanner drive motor Defective scanner home position sensor connector Defective scanner drive motor connecto
160. e because of the defective software Update the software because of the defective Incorrect Ticket software The access to MCS file is denied due to the no permission of access Access to MCS File Error Update the software because of the defective software Failed to create the MCS file because The number of files created with other applications on MCS File Creation Failed the Document Server has exceeded the limit HDD is full or not operating correctly Software error UFS file could not be created 220 UFS File Creation Failed Cancelled the Mail Due to Error Detected by NFAX No Mail Address For the Machine Address designated in the domain for SMTP sending does not exist Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scan to Email and IFAX transmission HDD full or not operating correctly Software error Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled due to a software error Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail address of the network administrator is registered Operational error in normal mail sending or direct SMTP sending Check the address selected in the address book for SMTP sending Check the domain selection Fax Error Codes Due to an FCU mail job task error the send was cancelled Address book was being edited during creation of the 14 50 Mail Job Task Error notification mail Software error Not even one return notification
161. e distance between the leading of the image area and the leading edge of the paper B 7 Adjust the leading edge registration Leading Regist SP6 006 002 The image area moves to the right side of the copier when you specify a larger value Measure the distance between the trailing edge of the image area and the trailing edge of the paper te Adjust the erased area on the trailing edge Trailing Erase SP6 006 003 Compare the copy with the original Adjust the sub scan magnification SP6 006 005 The specification is 1 026 155 4 Replacement and Adjustment 156 5 Troubleshooting Service Call Conditions 197 5 Troubleshooting Electrical Component Defects See Appendices for the following information 1 Sensor Switch i Deasa I e Blown Fuse Conditions Power Supply Unit 158 Card Save Function Card Save Function Overview Card Save The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print output Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch 1 bit number 4 Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full or until all file names have been used Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder prt cardsave File names are assigned sequentially from PRTOOOOO prn to PRT99999 prn An additional file PRT CTL will be created This file contains a list of all files created on the car
162. e glass 18 Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner R on the exposure glass 19 Close the ARDF 95 5G 2 Installation 20 21 22 23 24 b872i503 Check that the groove S of the ARDF is aligned with the groove T of the left scale on the scanner The difference in position between S and T must be within 0 5 mm Reinstall the platen sheet if both grooves are not aligned correctly Plug in and turn on the main power switch Check the ARDF operation Make a full size copy Then check to make sure the side to side and leading edge registrations are correct If they are not adjust the side to side and leading edge registration refer to DF Image Adjustment in the section Replacement and Adjustment USB 2 0 5D Slot Type B USB 2 0 SD Slot Type B This procedure explains how to install the USB 2 0 SD Slot for the SPF model 0069 Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list Installation Procedure d068i001 1 Remove the USB connect cover A 2 Installation b284i102a 3 Open the right door A 4 Rear cover B P x 5 d068i003 5 Remove the upper left cover A as shown above 58 USB 2 0 5D Slot Type B d068i004 6 Make three holes in the upper left cover with a screwdriver as shown above e Smooth the three holes in the upper left cover 5
163. e machine does not initialize the TD sensor output If the machine has not been used for a long period prints may have a dirty background In a case like this use this SP to mix the developer The message Completed is displayed when the program ends normally 2906 Tailing Crctn Shifts the image position at the intervals specified by SP2 906 002 When the copier is continuously printing vertical lines such as in tables the paper may not separate correctly This SP can prevent this Shift value 0 0 to 1 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 2906 1 Changes the interval of the image position shift specified by SP2 906 001 2908 Forced Toner Supp Supplies the toner to the development unit The processing stops under either of the 29062 following conditions The toner density in the development unit reaches the standard level The processing has continued for two 2 minutes 2915 Polygon Idling 0 1 15 5 2 25 5 68 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Specifies the polygon mirror motor idling time The polygon mirror motor starts its operation when an original is set a key is pressed or the platen cover or DF is opened The motor stops if no manual operation is performed for the specified time When you set O the motor does not stop while the copier is in the standby status 2921 Toner Supply Mode O Sensor 1 1 Sensor 2 DFU 29211 Selects the toner supply mode Keep the de
164. e memory card with the data in the NVRAM This takes about 20 seconds If uploading fails an error message appears If an error message appears retry the upload ge a Ue procedure 7 Turn off the main power switch 8 Remove the memory card 179 6 System Maintenance Reference NVRAM Download SP5 825 001 SP5 825 001 copies the data from a flash memory card to the NVRAM Most of the data in the NVRAM is overwritten The following data in the NVRAM remains unchanged these are not overwritten SP8 221 001 ADF Original Feed gt Front SP8 381 001 Total Total Printer Pages SP8 382 001 Copy Application Total Print Pages SP8 41 1 001 Prints Duplex Turn off the main power switch Remove the interface cover BP x 1 Turn the face of the flash memory card to the rear of the copier and insert it into the card slot 2 Turn on the main switch Activate the SP mode and select SP5 825 001 The copier overwrites the data in the NVRAM with the data in the memory card This takes about one second If downloading fails an error message appears If an error message appears retry the download procedure Turn off the main power switch 8 Remove the memory card Firmware Update Procedure This section illustrates how to update the firmware 2 3 Turn the main power switch off Remove the interface cover F x T Turn the face of the flash memory card to the rear of the copier an
165. e plate A F x 2 94 Exterior Covers and Operation Panel Operation Panel and Upper Covers C b262r501 1 Remove the ARDF For DO72 Remove the ARDF if it has been installed Rear cover 8 Rear Cover Slide the upper left cover A to the rear Rear scale B P x 3 Slide the upper right cover C to the rear Front left cover D f x 2 Operation panel E P x 4 E x 1 O GO KR OO N Front right cover F 95 4 Replacement and Adjustment Right Door b130r904 A 1 Open the right door A 2 Release the strap B 3 Right door EX x 1 Bypass Tray 96 Exterior Covers and Operation Panel 1 Press the stopper rails A inward Platen Cover Sensor b262r505 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Rear scale i Operation Panel and Upper Covers 3 Platen cover sensor A E x 1 hook 98 4 Replacement and Adjustment Scanner Unit To clean the mirrors and lenses use a blower brush or wet cotton Exposure Glass To clean the exposure glass use alcohol or glass cleaner Non ARDF machines 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Scale plate S Operation Panel and Upper Covers 3 Exposure glass A ARDF equipped machines 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Rear scale upper right cover 8i Operation Panel and Upper Covers 3 Exposure glass A Reassembling Make sure that the marking on the glass is at the rear left corner a
166. ection reset time SP2 103 011 parameter HIGH 10 Not used a Do not change the settings Interval between dialing the last digit d switching the Oh rel to th a AM bi ar s 20 ms Factory setting 500 ms external telephone when dialing from the operation panel in handset mode Bits and 1 Handset off hook detection time Bit 1 0 Bit O O 200 ms Bit 1 0 Bit O 1 800 ms Other Not used Bits 2 and 3 Handset on hook detection time Bit 3 O Bit 2 O 200 ms Bit 3 O Bit 2 1 800 ms Other Not used Bits 4 to 7 Not used Not used m Do not change the settings Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit high byte If both addresses contain FF BCD Hz tone detection is Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled upper limit low byte 297 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Acceptable CED detection frequency 6805A3 If both addresses contain FF lower limit high byte BCD Hz tone detection is disabled Acceptable CED detection frequency 6805A4 lower limit low byte 6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms 20 ms Factory setting 200 ms Acceptable CNG detection frequency 6805A6 If both addresses contain FF upper limit high byte BCD Hz tone detection is disabled Acceptable CNG detection frequency 6805A7 5 upper limit low byte Acceptabl tection f 6805 8 cceptable detection frequency lower lim
167. ed and Registration Clutches 133 4 Replacement and Adjustment PSU b130r923 1 Open the front door 2 Copy tray V Copy Tray 3 PSU assembly A EX x 4 P x 8 b130r925 4 PSU B ER x 4 F x 6 134 Other Replacements Contact Release Solenoid b130r929 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 High voltage power supply board V High Voltage Power Supply Board 3 Contact release solenoid A 1 spring 8 x 1 Toner Supply Clutch 1 Toner bottle holder 135 4 Replacement and Adjustment Copy tray Tray Rear cover Rear Cover Disconnect the connector on C19 on the BICU Push the clutch coupler A to the rear side and remove the clip ring B from the back of the copier Coupler and spring C e I o o Lift the toner supply clutch D and remove it e When removing note how the wire goes through a clamp and also note where it passes through the rear of the machine MD sus Lithium Batteries A CAUTION Incorrect replacement of lithium battery s on the controller or on the fax unit poses risk of explosion Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the manvfacturer Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Procedure b284r102a 1 Open the right door A 2 Rear cover B F x 5 3 Scanner upper left cover 136 Other Replacements
168. efective SG3 firmware or board defective SG3 firmware or board defective The other terminal did not have a compatible communication mode e g the other terminal was a V 34 data modem and not a fax modem A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal when polling rx was initiated from the calling terminal The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due to noise etc ANSam was too short to detect Check the line connection and condition Try making a call to another V 8 V 34 fax The terminal could not detect ANSam Check the line connection and condition Try receiving a call from another V 8 V 34 fax The called terminal could not detect a CM due to noise Check line connection and condition Try making a call to another V 8 V 34 fax The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to noise eic A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass JM to the other end Check the line connection and condition Try receiving a call from another V 8 V 34 fax The called terminal detected CI while waiting for a V 21 signal The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V 34 phase 2 line probing The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V 34 phase 3 equalizer training The line was disconnected due to a timeout in the V 34 phase 4 control channel start up The line was disconnected due to a timeout in the V 34 control channel restart sequence The line
169. em Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 002 A4 003 A5 004 BA 005 B5 DLT ela These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF PrtPGS Ppr Tray 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 451 These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station ce ce 151 152 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables T PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications These counters are not the same as the PM counter The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted During duplex printing pages printed on both sides count as 1 and a page printed on one side counts as 1 C PrtPGS Ppr 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 462 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application F PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 463 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application P PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 464 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application Normal Back System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 T T PHPGS FIN 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications C PrtPGS FIN 0 to 999999
170. emory storage report O Off 1 On Bit 3 Polling reserve report polling reception Off 1 On Bit 4 Polling result report polling reception Off 1 On Bit 5 Transmission result report immediate transmissions O Off 1 On Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Journal O Off 1 On 6800D4 H User parameter switch O4 SWUSR 04 Automatic report printout Bit O Not used Bit 1 Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output O Off 1 On Bits 2 to 3 Not used Bit 4 Indicates the parties O Not indicated 1 Indicated Bit 5 Include sender s name on reports O Off 1 On Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Inclusion of a sample image on reports Off 1 On 6800D5 H User parameter switch O5 SWUSR 05 Bit O Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition O Enabled 1 Disabled Service RAM Addresses Bits 1 and 2 Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages Paper end toner end jam and during night mode Bit 2 O Bit 1 The machine receives all the fax messages Bit 2 O Bit 1 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI Bit 2 1 Bit 1 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code Bit 2 1 Bit 1 1 The machine does not receive anything Bits 3 and 4 Not used Bit 5 Just size printing O Off 1 On Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Add paper display when a cassette is empty Off 1 On 6800D6 H User parameter switch 06 S
171. ent RTN or PIN after receiving a page because The other end may have a defective modem NCU there were too many errors FCU try sending to another machine Check for line problems and noise Cross reference Tx level NCU Parameter 01 PSTN Cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode Incompatible or defective remote terminal try sending to another machine Noisy line resend Non standard post message Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer response code received settings Replace the NCU or FCU Cross reference See error code 0 08 The other terminal is not capable of accepting the following functions or the other terminal s memory is full The other terminal is not Cou capable of specific functions Transfer function SEP SUB PWD SID 209 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Check the line connection Replace the NCU or FCU Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings CFR or FIT not detected after MD ad The other end may have disconnected or it may be modem training in confidential defective try calling another machine or transfer mode If the rx signal level is too low there may be a line problem Cross reference See error code 0 08 Check the line connection Replace the NCU or FCU Check for line problems Try calling another fax machine Facsimile data not received
172. er 0 Off 1 On Prints the date and time on received fax messages Disabled 1 Enabled O If a 2 page RX transmission is split is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a 2 is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page 1 If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two pages for example 2 is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a 2 is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page This helps the user to identify pages that have been split because the size of the paper is smaller than the size of the document received When A5 is used to print an A4 size document for example 1 Default 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previous page are repeated at the top of the next page The next page continues from where the previous page stopped without any repeated text This switch is only effective when user parameter O2 bit 2 printing the received date and time on received fax messages is enabled 1 The machine prints the received and printed date and time at the bottom of each received page Printer Switch O1 Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 103 002 Printer Switch 02 SP No 1 103 003 260 Bit Switches 1st paper feed station usage for fax O The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages printing and reports Enabled 1 The specified paper feed station will not be used for
173. er that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203 O Succeeded 1 Inquiry number error Registration in progress Proxy error proxy enabled Proxy error proxy disabled Proxy error Illegal user name or password Communication error Certification update error Other error ON Oo GO R M Inquiry executing Instl Rgstltn Executes Embedded RCG Registration Instl Rgstltn Rst Displays a number that indicates the registration result Succeeded 2 Registration in progress 3 Proxy error proxy enabled 4 Proxy error proxy disabled 5 Proxy error Illegal user name or password 6 Communication error 7 Certification update error 8 Other error Instl Ref Section 299 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL 9 Registration executing 109 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Instl Error Code Displays number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed Mod Parameter 11003 Unexpected error 12002 Inquiry registration attempted without acquiring device status Operation Error Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry 12003 Incorrect Setting and no previous registration Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2 1200
174. error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception 223 224 Repeated Destination Registration Error Send Registration Error Memory Overflow Memory Access Error Incorrect ID Code Transfer Station Function Original length exceeded the maximum scan length Memory overflow while receiving Tx or rx job stalled due to line disconnection at the other end 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Could not repeat receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not be created this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception Could not receive the file for transfer to the final destination The format of the final destination or the transfer destination is incorrect Destinations are full so the final and transfer destinations could not be created Transmission could not be received because memory overflowed during the transaction Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction of SAF memory The machine rejected an incoming e mail for transfer request because the ID code in the incoming e mail did not match the ID code registered in the machine The machine rejected an incoming e mail for transfer because the transfer function was unavailable Divide the original into more than one page Checkthe resolution used for scanning Lower
175. ers is initialized Log Data Error An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating Damaged log data file in the HDD Log Data Error 1 Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 An encryption module not installed Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730 004 is off Install the DESS module Log Data Error 2 Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data Log Data Error 3 Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730 004 is off Unusual log encryption function due Log Data Error 4 to defective NVRAM data Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 A5 46 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Log Data Error 5 Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 Other than the above causes Ask your supervisor Incorrect updating for the system The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM security chip 1 A request to get access to the MLB was not answered within the specitied time Electronic total counter error The value of the total counter is out of the normal range Printer error An application error that stops the machine operation is detected firmware Defective flash ROM on the controller
176. ery specified by F code or SMTP reception is done 3 With relay broadcasting 1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function Thisswitch does not apply for condition 3 when the RX system is set up for memory sending delivery by F code sending with SMTP RX and when operators are using FOL to prevent problems when receiving transmissions Subject corresponding to mail post database 294 250 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 l fax Switch 05 SP No 1 102 006 FUNCTION COMMENTS Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients Determines whether the e mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal For example 1st destination Total number of destinations 9 in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations O Not recorded 1 Recorded I Fax Automatic Re dial Setting Determines whether the l fax automatically redials when OFF an error occurs 1 ON l fax Switch O6 Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 007 l fax Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 008 l fax Switch 08 SP No 1 102 009 FUNCTION COMMENTS Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception 0 7 This setting determines the amount of SAF Store and Forward memory SAF stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location and also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed
177. ese motors normally operates Selecting OFF turns off the motor that you have started by selecting ON However this does not guarantee that the motor normally stops during normal operation 164 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Printer Service Mode Service Mode Table Bit Switch Enables Disables MFP I O Timeouts Enabled The MFP I O Timeout setting will have no affect I O Timeouts will never occur Enabled Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot Card Save Function in the service tables of Field Service Manual bit5 D bit bit 7 RPCS PCL Printable area frame border Enable The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the printable area 165 166 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables A collation type shift or normal will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a bit NO Collate Type configured f 5 0 is enabled this Bit Switch has no effect bit3 PCL5e c PS PDL Auto Switching O Enable 1 Disable Disabled The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid job Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e c If Auto PDL switching is disabled these jobs will not be printed properly IN Ox System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 mim o p o bit2 PCL5e c Legacy HP compatibility Enabled Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000 HP8000
178. esesecseeeecsesecsenecseseeseseees 24 Power T 28 HO 29 B B RN RD m 29 Opiienal Handset Only tor DOGS DOG 36 Paper Toy UM e ee 39 PSS SO Si 39 Installation 2 esse serrer prn ass sess esee nsns 39 U i 2 rvi 3 Ireless A gt a ox lt ccrcoicinaweisavaisacaeiisaeovacweiescualdecicslvaaaeisaasicsawelcsaueuseeudpwerenewseneecideses ataOverwrite ecurity nit ype EE E E EEEE 3 Preventive Maintenance 4 Replacement and Adjustment Li hi m B i 9 ial Is and Lubri 92 pecial Tools ana LUBCON ior C dO ion Panel 29 Xierior Covers dnd KS PATON QM wm UU m TU TM keai 7 gt Scale Plate 0067 only essere entente nennen nnne 4 O ion Panel and U C 29 perdion Faneiand Upper n EE RIPE EUM Right D 96 1 18 gt m silio MEN Om T A Platen Cover Sens Oiscm et at nt dudes e 7 Uni 98 COET A en ere bi dM NIMIUM ee ee MEUM eee NU PM Nr I 3 Lens cnn RE
179. et D the destination Check the error e mail message Inform the administrator of the LAN 228 IP Fax Troubleshooting IP Fax Troubleshooting This section is used only for F SPF models D068 D069 IP Fax Transmission Cannot send by IP Address Host Name E LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection Specitied IP address host name correct Check the IP address host name is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using irewa is installe another method Fax Internet Fax Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported IP address of local machine registered Register the IP address Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720 Specified port number correct Confirm the port number of the remote fax Send by specifying the port number DNS server registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal Remote fax switched off or busy Check that the remote fax is switched on Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth Remote fax a T 38 terminal Raise the delay level IPFAX SW 01 Bit O to 3 Network bandwidth too narrow IP Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed Set IP Fax SWOO Bit 6 to 1 Check whether the remote fax cancelled the 12 Remote fax cancelled transmission NU transmission 229 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide
180. ets a break signal after Defective communication between completing the communication with BICU and scanner board the scanner board and does not get a signal from the scanner board for 10 seconds or more 5G SC Tables Basic D067 D072 ADF gate error 760 Defective ADF board The ADF sends the FGATE signal before it TP o e Defective input output board is requested to scan originals e Loose connection ADF gate abnormal 2 76 The ADF does not send the FGATE signal conmeetor within 30 seconds after the ADF starts Defective SBU board scanning ADF gate abnormal 3 769 The ADF continues to send the FGATE signal for more than 60 seconds after the Defective SBU board starts scanning Mechanical total counter error 901 Defective mechanical total counter The poling module does not detect the Defective BICU mechanical total counter e Loose connection 903 The check f the total Defective on the BICU correct An error occurs during the memory check Defective memory VD conducted when the main power switch is Defective BICU turned on or when the copier is recovering from the energy saver mode and the memory IMAC hardware error 929 Defective IMAC pn is not completed Defective BICU within a certain period loose connection 58 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions
181. etting value to 1 ON A Turn the main switch off and on Perform the Printer Scanner settings 1 Start the SP mode 2 Select SP5 801 001 and execute the initialization 3 Exit the SP mode and then start the UP mode 4 Select the Remote Service User Tool gt System Settings gt Administrator Tools gt Extended Security gt Remote Service and select Prohibit 5 Exit the UP mode and then start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 870 003 and execute initialization for Remote 7 Select SP5 907 001 and specify the Plug amp Play 8 Select SP5 870 001 and execute writing certification for Remote 9 Select SP5 302 002 and specify the time zone 10 Select SP5 307 001 003 and 004 and specify the daylight saving time settings 11 Exit the SP mode and turn the main switch off and on 12 Start the UP mode 13 Specify the date and time with Set Date or Set Time User Tool gt System Settings gt Set Date or Set Time 22 Turn the main switch off and on 23 Check the operations Controller Options Controller Options Overview This machine has I F card slots and SD card slots for optional I F connections and applications d068i014 I F Card Slot Slot A is used for one of the optional I F connections IEEE1284 IEEE802 11a g Wireless LAN or Gigabit Ethernet SD Card Slot Slot 1 is used for options provided on SD cards The application SD card HDD Encryp
182. ew PCU remove the Styrofoam and tags Installation Procedure in the chapter Installation Initialization 111 4 Replacement and Adjustment After you turn on the main power switch the copier automatically initializes the new PCU When the copier is executing initialization it is important that you Do not turn off the main power switch Do not open or remove exterior covers Quenching Lamp b130r953 1 PCU PCU 2 Quenching lamp A EE x 1 112 Exhaust Fan and Main Motor Exhaust Fan and Main Motor Exhaust Fan b130r926 1 Rear cover i8 Rear Cover 2 Exhaust fan A F x 2 EP x 1 Reassembling Make sure that the arrow B on the frame points to the rear side The arrow indicates the direction of airflow 113 4 Replacement and Adjustment Main Motor b130r917 1 Rear cover Rear Cover High voltage power supply board High Voltage Power Supply Board Ground plate A F x 1 Main motor with the gear cover B EP x 1 F x 7x22 bushings KR O N 5 All gears C 6 Main motor D F x A Reassembling Attach the main motor before attaching the gears 114 Paper Feed Paper Feed Paper Feed Roller and Friction Pad When handling the paper tray or the paper feed roller use caution Do not touch the surface of paper feed rollers To avoid paper jams correctly set the side and end fences in the paper tray b130
183. f one Bit Bi 570 Nowe or more of the following symptoms Occurs Bit 7 O Bit 6 O Bit 5 1 Low Bit 7 O Bit 6 1 Bit 5 Medium Bit 7 O Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 High Communication error with error codes such as 0 20 0 23 etc Modem rate fallback occurs frequently Bit 7 P Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 Disabled Do not use settings other than listed on the left IF the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used Switch 02 304 Dedicated Transmission Parameters Initial Tx modem rate Bit3 Bit2 Bit BitO If training with a particular remote terminal always takes too long the initial modem rate may be too high Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these bits Forthe settings 14 4 or kbps slower Switch OA bit 4 must be changed to Do not use settings other than listed on the left IF the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used ES EX Other settings Not used Switch 03 305 306 Inch mm conversion before tx Bit 1 O Bit Inch mm conversion available Bit 1 O Bit O 1 Inch only Bit 1 1 O Not used Bit 1 1 Bit O 1 Disabled DIS NSF detection method Bit 3 O Bit 2 O First DIS or NSF Bit 3 O Bit 2 1 Second DIS or NSF Bit 3 1 Bit 2 O Not used Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 Disabled V 8 protocol 0 Off 1 Disabled Compression modes available in
184. f the PCU Loose connection of the PCU Defective high voltage supply board Defective ID sensor Insufficient developer Defective drum operation Defective development roller operation Loose connection of the PCU Insufficient voltage for the charge roller 27 28 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions The feedback voltage of the transfer roller is insufficient The feedback voltage of the transfer roller is insufficient The main motor does not reach its operation speed within 0 7 second Or the main motor remains out of its operation speed for 0 7 second after reaching the operation speed The fusing temperature remains lower than the specified temperature by 20 degrees Celsius The fusing temperature rises 7 degrees or less in two seconds and this continues 5 times consecutively Or the fusing temperature is not detected within 25 or 35 seconds Transfer roller leak error positive electrode Defective high voltage supply board Loose connection of the PCU Incorrect installation of the transfer unit or the separation unit Defective transfer roller Defective high voltage supply board Loose connection of the PCU Incorrect installation of the transfer unit or the separation unit Defective transfer roller Overload Defective main motor Defective thermistor Incorrect installation of the thermistor Defective power supply unit Loose connectors Defective thermistor I
185. fault setting as long as the TD sensor is working 2922 Toner Supply Time 0 1 to 5 0 O 6 O 1 s step Adjusts the toner supply time The toner supply motor remains on for the specified time To validate this setting select in SP2 921 001 Specify a greater value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas 2926 Standard Vt 0 00 to 5 00 2 50 0 01 V step DFU Adjusts Vts the Vt value for new developer The TD sensor output is adjusted to this value during the TD sensor initial setting process This SP is effective only when SP2 921001 is o 1 n or ad 2927 ID Sensor Control 0 No 1 Yes 2927 1 Determines whether the ID sensor signal is referenced or not for the toner density control Keep the default value in usual operations Clears the following messages and counters without supplying the toner Toner near end message Toner end message Toner near end counter Toner end counter Do not use this SP in usual operations When the toner in the development unit is abnormally insufficient the drum may attract the toner carrier to its surface The toner carrier damages the drum surface 2929 Adjust the upper or lower Vref limit 69 70 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 0307330 320 DFU 0 8010 3 50 070 DFU Adjusts the temperature threshold The ID sensor signal is not referenced whe
186. fo Count Reset Dev Count 004 E Clears the development counter SP7 99 1 004 Reset ID Er Count 005 Clears the ID sensor error counter SP7 99 1 005 SP8 XXX History Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation the mode of operation is referred to as an application Before reading the Group 8 Service Table make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean What it means Grand total of the items counted for all applications C F Total Grand Total P etc Copy application Fax application Totals pages jobs etc executed for each application Scan application Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor Utilities developed with the SDK Software Development Kit will also be counted with this group in the Other applications external network applications for example ts uture RN Print application when the job was not stored on the document server 141 142 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand Key for Abbreviations By e g TJobs Apl 7 Total Jobs by Application More 2 2 or more 4 A or more Designated Ap
187. friction pad D 119 4 Replacement and Adjustment Paper Feed and Registration Clutches b130r917 1 Paper tray High voltage power supply board 8 High Voltage Power Supply Board Ground plate A P x 1 Gear cover B EF x 1 P x 7 158x2 2 bushings Do not remove the main motor from the gear cover KR O N 120 Paper Feed C F 5 Ground plate C F x 15 6 Slowly push the clutch holder D and remove the registration clutch E SD 1 E x 1 7 Paper feed clutch F 121 4 Replacement and Adjustment Image Transfer Transfer Roller A CAUTION Do not touch the transfer roller with your bare hands Do not scratch the transfer roller The transfer roller is easily damaged b130r930 1 Right door Right Door 2 Raise the levers A B at the ends of the image transfer roller 3 Release the image transfer roller C Reassembling Make sure that the springs D are in the original positions 122 ID Sensor and Duplex Roller Oo KR W N Right door Right Door Lower guide A Idle roller holders B C Idle roller D Roller guide E Transfer unit F One way gear C x 1 Duplex roller H amp x 1 3 bushings Image Transfer 123 4 Replacement and Adjustment b130r931 b130r932 1 Right door V Right Door 2 Discharge plate A 124
188. g Edge 4012 2 Trailing Edge Adjusts the scanning margin Generally the scanning margin should be as little as possible To adjust the image 4012 3 Left Side area use SP2 101 4012 4 Right Side me 4013 1 Conducts the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on 4015 White Plate Scan 4015 1 Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate The base value is 17 8 mm from the scanner home position This SP specifies the offset from this base value 40152 Adjusts the distance of the white plate scan The scan begins from the start position SP4 015 001 and ends at the specified distance The base value is 2 0 mm This SP decides the offset from this base value Specify O zero or a larger value 4428 Scan Auto Adj Conducts the automatic scanner adjustment Use this SP after replacing the white plate V Scanning in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4606 SBU Offset Target 7 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 4607 1 EVEN 472000 f01063 10 1 ssp 4607 3 Adjusts the target black level for each signal 4607 4 GREEN These are used for offset adjustment in the SBU 4607 5 BLUE 4472000 010255 180 1 Adjusts the target white level for each signal These are used for gain adjustment in the SBU 462320 Oto 255 1 step Displays the result value of the offset adjustment in the 4628 SBU Gain Result 4628 1 EVEN 010 255 1 ste Displaysthe result va
189. grounding plate 3 LD unit B P x 2 4 Polygon mirror motor C P x A Reassembling Check that the polygon mirror and toroidal lens are clean Dust or other foreign substances may interfere with the operation of the LD unit 140 ARDF ARDF ARDF 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 7 Q 2 H b872i502a b872i108a Remove the DF interface cables A x 2 hook x 2 Remove the ground cable B P x 1 Remove the stud screw Remove the ARDF D RR CO N 141 4 Replacement and Adjustment DF Rear Cover b872r103 1 Open the ARDF A 2 Release the three hooks b872r104 3 Open the DF left cover B 4 Open the original tray C 5 DF rear cover D P x 1 hook x 4 Original Feed Unit 1 Open the DF left cover 142 ARDF b872r101 2 Original feed unit A x 1 Separation Roller 1 Open the DF left cover 2 Original feed unit Original Feed Unit b872r102 3 Separation roller cover A hook x 2 4 Separation roller stopper B hook 5 Separation roller C DF Drive Board 1 DF rear cover 8 DF Rear Cover 143 4 Replacement and Adjustment b872r105 2 DF drive board A F x 2 ES x A ground cable x 1 Original Set and DF Inverter Sensor 1 Open the DF left cover 2 Original feed unit i Original Feed Unit 3 DF feed clutch V DF Feed Clutch b872r109 4 Origi
190. h Print out the configuration page User Tools Counter gt Printer Features gt List Test Print and then check that this device is detected VM Card Type L D467 Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below Accessories Ue 78 2 Installation Installation d068i019 1 Switch the machine off 2 Insert the SD card A into SD Slot 2 lower e This SD card must be inserted into Slot 2 the lower slot Gigabit Ethernet A CAUTION e Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure d068i017 1 Remove the F slot cover A F x 2 2 Install the Gigabit Ethernet board Knob screw x 2 into the F slot Controller Options d067r113 3 Attach one ferrite core A to the Ethernet interface cable and then attach the other ferrite core B about 1Ocm from the end of the Ethernet interface cable 4 Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the Gigabit Ethernet port Make sure that the machine can recognize this option see Check All Connections at the end of this section HDD Option D467 only for D067 D068 Component Check Screw Keytop Document Server Not used La Knob Screw Not used 7 2 Installation 03621101 Installation Procedure 1 Controller box cover A F x 13 80 Controller Options d068r028 1 Remove the screw
191. h Paper length 0 75 x N x 5mm Length of the duplicated image on the next page when page separation has taken place Bit 6 O Bit 5 O 4 mm Bit 6 1 Bit5 10 mm Bit 6 O Bit5 12 15 mm Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 Not used Printer Switch O5 Not used do not change the settings Printer Switch O6 SP No 1 103 007 Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out when the Just Size Printing feature is enabled Printing will not start Cross reference 1 Printing will start if another Just size printing on off User switch O5 bit 5 cassette has a suitable size of paper based on the paper size selection priority tables 202 Bit Switches Printer Switch 07 SP No 1 103 008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS List of destinations in the Communication Failure Report for broadcastin m 9 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred O All destinations are printed on the Communication Failure Report 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred Printer Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 103 009 Printer Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 103 010 Printer Switch OA Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 103 011 Printer Switch OB Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 103 012 Printer Switch OC Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 103 013 Printer Switch OD Not used do not change
192. h for the sub scan This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 OCT Te 19 35 179 4174 5 172 O n Sub Scan MTF Level Dor 1 1 step 00 002 003 004 05 Adjust the smooth level This setting is only activated for specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 None 1 Weak 2 Strong E Brightness O to 255 128 1 step Adjust the brightness level This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 9 80 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 007 Adjust the contrast level This setting is only activated for specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 4936 Gray Scale Image Adjust Main Scan MTF Level 15 1 step Adjust the MTF level for the main scan This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 None 1 Level 1 to 15 Level 15 Main Scan MTF Strength 5 1 step Adjust the MTF strength for the main scan This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 O t 117 32 2 5 172 Sub Scan MTF Level Oto 13 1 step 003 Adjust the MTF level for the sub scan This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 O No 1 Level 1 to 13 Level 13 Sub Scan MTF Strength 5 1 step Adjust the MTF strength for the sub scan This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 0 1 11732 2 17 16 3 1
193. hassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required A WARNING e Use of controls not specified in this manual or performance of adjustments or procedures not specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure ZA WARNING FOR LASER UNIT A WARNING Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes CAUTION MARKING CAUTION VORSICHT CAUTION CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 38 WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN b262r934 Symbols and Abbreviations This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations is as follows ce owen Connector LEF Long Edge Feed Short Edge Feed NM Core Technology manual Short Edge Feed SEF Long Edge Feed LEF Cautions Notes etc The following headings provide special information ANWARNING Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death A CAUTION e Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine TABLE OF CONTENTS imponan
194. he PC 2 Check that PC can connect with the machine 3 LAN settings in the machine LAN settings in the machine Check that the LAN cable is connected to the machine Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit Check that other devices connected to the LAN can communicate through the LAN Check the network settings on the PC Is the IP address registered in the TCP IP properties in the network setup correct e Check the IP address with the administrator of the network Use the ping command on the PC to contact the machine Atthe MS DOS prompt type ping then the IP address of the machine then press Enter Check the LAN parameters e Check if there is an IP address conflict with other PCs Use the Network function in the User Tools If there is an IP address conflict inform the administrator Check the LAN parameters e Check if there is an IP address conflict with other PCs Use the Network function in the User Tools If there is an IP address conflict inform the administrator IFAX Troubleshooting Make sure that the machine can log into the e mail server 1 E mail account on Check that the account and password stored in the server the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to check Between machine and e mail server Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send receive e mail
195. he SIP server Defective SIP server The input password for the authentication does not match the password registered in the SIP server Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server Occurs for any error other than 14 01 to 16 For example the mail address of the system administrator is not registered Failed to connectto the SMTP server timeout because the server could not be found The PC is not ready to transfer files SMTP server not functioning correctly The DNS IP address is not registered Network not operating correctly Destination folder selection not correct SMTP server operating incorrectly or the destination for direct SMTP sending is not correct Contact the system administrator and check that the SMTP server has the correct settings and operates correctly Contact the system administrator for direct SMTP sending and check the sending destination 2147 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Failed to access the SMTP server because the access is denied SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem with the SMTP server and to check that the SMTP server settings are correct Folder send destination is incorrect Contact the system Access to SMTP Server Denied y 14 03 450 administrator to determine that the SMTP server settings and path to the server are correct Device settings incorrect Confirm
196. he gateway Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address The address is necessary to set up embedded RCG N The address display is limited to 127 characters Characters beyond the 127th character are ignored This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report HTTP Proxy Pot HTTP Proxy Pot Port This SP sets the port number ofthe proxy server used for communication between embedded 064 RCG N and the gateway This setting is necessary to set up embedded RCG N e This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 HTTP Proxy Aut Usr This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication user name The length of the name is limited to 31 characters Any character beyond the 3 1st character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report HTTP Proxy Aut Pass This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication password Thelength of the password is limited to 31 characters Any character beyond the 3 1st character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report 101 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Cer Updt Cond Displays the status of the certification update The certification used by embedded RCG is set correctly The certification request setAuthKey for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated
197. he otherterminal may be faulty try sending to another CFR or FTT not received after machine modem training If the rx signal is weak or defective there may be a bad line Cross reference Tx level NCU Parameter O1 PSTN Cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode 207 208 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Check the line connection Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer Modem training fails even Replace the FCU shifts down to 2400 bps e Check for line problems Cross reference See error code 0 04 Check the line connection Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the NCU or FCU The other terminal did not reply to DCS The other end may be defective or incompatible try sending to another machine Check for line problems Cross reference See error code 0 04 Check the line connection Replace the NCU or FCU No post message response The other end may have jammed or run out of paper trom the other end atter a page The other end user may have disconnected the call Wesson Check for a bad line The other end may be defective try sending to another machine Fax Error Codes Check the line connection Replace the NCU or FCU The other end may have jammed or run out of paper or memory space Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer The other end s
198. he previous switch Prev until the correct switch is displayed Then go back to step 10 After the setting is changed press OK key 11 After finishing reset bit O of System Bit Switch OO to O Parameters Fax Parameters The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF H all the parameters are disabled Switch 00 FUNCTION AND COMMENTS Dedicated Transmission Parameters ITU T T1 time for PSTN G3 mode If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting adjust this byte The T1 time is the value stored in this byte in hex code multiplied by 1 second Range O to 120 s OOh to 78h FFh The local NCU parameter factory setting is used Do not program a value between 79h and FEh Switch O1 FUNCTION COMMENIS Bit BitO If communication with a particular remote terminal often contains errors the signal level may be inappropriate Adjust the Tx level for communications with that terminal until the results are better IF the setting is Disabled the NCU 5 setting is used Do not use settings other than listed Disabled 303 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange when calling the number stored in this Quick Speed Dial Cable equalizer Also try using the cable equalizer i
199. he security settings are initialized SP6 XXX Reports DOSE CNN System Parameter List d FS Touch the ON button to print the system parameter list Service Monitor is 001 Touch the ON button to print the service monitor report System Service Mode G3 Protocol Dump List G3 1 All Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for Communications the G3 1 line G3 1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication 1 Communication for the G3 1 line All Alles printout 955 Alles printout 955 out Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory including confidential messages 105 Do not use this function unless the customer is having trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files stored using the memory lock feature Joumal Printout Print Joumal Printout The machine prints all the communication records on 001 All Journals P the report The machine prints all communication records after the Specified Dat specified date 209 240 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Log List Print out 001 All log files ale 02 003 SC TRAP Stored 004 Decompression 005 Scanner 107 JOB SAF These log print out functions are for designer use only 07 Reconstruction 008 JBIG GSCcu 010 Fax Job 011 CCU 012 Scanner Condition IP Protocol Dump List Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for All Co
200. hite line erase is not used and white level correction is used instead This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4 921 ioa de dc Selects the black line erase level This setting is effective only when originals are scanned by the DF 0 No 1 Very weak 2 Weak 3 Strong This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4 921 SP5 XXX Mode 5001 All Indicators On Turns on all LEDs The LCD turns on or off every 3 seconds Press the reset key to end this program Oorl 5045 Display Counter 1 counter 1 2 couters 5045 1 Displays the number of the installed couter 0 None 1 Key Card20 Optional Counter Type 2 Key Card20 11 Key Card4 12 Key Card4 187 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 5113 1 Selects the corresponding key for installed devices such as coin lock 5120 Clear OP Count Remove O2 Yes 1 Standby only 22No Specifies the condition to reset the copy job settings when the key counter is removed Y Yes The settings are cleared when the counter is removed 1 StdBy Standby only The settings are cleared when the counter is removed at the end of a job 2 No The settings are not cleared under either condition As for duplex copying the job settings are always preserved regardless of these setting 5121 Count Up Timing 0 Feed In 1 Exit Selects the count up timing O
201. i Media function Dor 1 1 7 OFF 1 ON Multi Media Func Compression level grayscale or full color These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale or full color processing mode that can be selected with the notch settings on the operation panel Range 5 lowest ratio lt gt 95 highest ratio 204 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 Comp5 5 95 Lowest I Qual 5 to 95 95 1 step For the settings of the image quality see the copier SP mode table 205 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 206 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Fax Error Codes e This section is used only for F SPF models 0068 0069 e f an error code occurs retry the communication If the same problem occurs try to fix the problem as suggested below Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report Check the line connection The machine at the other end may be incompatible Replace the NCU or FCU Check for DIS NSF with an oscilloscope DIS NSF not detected within 40 s of Start being pressed If the rx signal is weak there may be a bad line The other party is out of paper or has a jammed printer DCN received unexpectedly The other party pressed Stop during communication Incompatible modem at the other end Check the line connection Try changing the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the FCU T
202. ice representative who has completed the training course on those relevant models A WARNING Keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols A fire or an explosion might occur if this precaution is not observed Lithium Batteries Incorrect replacement of lithium battery s on the FCU controller board and memory board unit may pose risk of explosion Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Safe and Ecological Disposal 1 Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner Toner dust may ignite suddenly if exposed to an open flame 2 Dispose of used toner developer and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations These are nontoxic supplies 3 Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations 4 When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build up Laser Safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH prohibits the repair of laser based optical units in the field The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser c
203. initializes the job login Initializes the system default and interface settings IP address also SmartNetMonitor for Admin WeblmageMonitor settings and the TELNET settings e The name of Apple talk is not cleared only if this SP is executed Turns off and on after executing this SP Initializes the job login ID SmartNetMonitor for Admin job history and local storage file numbers O14 Initializes the DCS Delivery Control Service settings O15 Initializes the UCS User Information Control Service settings 96 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 016 Initializes the MIRS Machine Information Report Service settings EN 017 Initializes the CCS Certification and Charge control Service settings SRM Memory Clr 018 Initializes the SRM System Resource Manager settings 019 Initializes the LCS Log Count Service settings 020 Initializes Web application settings 5802 Machine Free Run 0 or 1 0 0 No 1 Yes Conducts machine free run including the scanner unit Set 1 and then press Press key again to start Free Run When this SP is set to the machine operates normally even ied key is pressed Input Check Input Check in this chapter Output Check Output Check in this chapter Selects the display language 2 North America 3 Europe 5 Asia 6 China SP5 807 001 is not cleared by SP5 801 002 NOTE SC982 is displayed if y
204. into place 8 Remove the adjustment tools 103 104 4 Replacement and Adjustment Fusing Fusing Unit A NCAUTION Before handling the fusing unit make sure that the unit is cool enough The fusing unit can be very hot A 1 Copy tray Copy Tray 2 Open the right door 3 Connector cover A F x 1 When reinstalling attach the ground wire 4 Fusing unit B P x 2 EB x 4 Fusing Exit Sensor 1 Fusing unit Fusing Unit 2 Exit sensor A GE x 1 Hot Roller Stripper Pawls Take care not to damage the hot roller stripper pawls and the tension springs 105 4 Replacement and Adjustment 1 Fusing unit Fusing Unit 2 Separate the fusing unit into two sections the hot roller section A and the pressure roller section B P x 2 After removing the screws lower the pressure roller section about halfway and then slide it toward the front side to detach it 3 Support rollers C 4 Hot roller stripper D e Remove the spacer E P x 1 if you are removing the hot roller assembly 7 Hot Roller 8 Fusing Lamp Hot Roller and Fusing Lamp A CAUTION Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with your bare hands 106 Fusing 1 Hot roller stripper pawls and spacers i Hot Roller Stripper Pawls 2 Hot roller assembly A F x 2 3 Fusing lamp B When reassembling check that the direction of the fusing lamp is c
205. ion machine receives it After receiving each page 1 The machine prints the complete message after the 1 After receiving all pages machine receives all the pages in the memory 253 254 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 O When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than SC1201 and SC1207 the fax unit automatically resets Action when a fax SC has occurred itself 1 When the fax unit detects any fax SC code the fax unit stops 1 Fax unit stops P Cross Reference Fax SC codes See Troubleshooting I Fax Switches l fax Switch OO Not used do not change the settings SP No 1 102 001 l fax Switch O1 SP No 1 102 002 No Original Line Resolution of TX These settings setthe maximum resolution ofthe original that Attachment File the destination can receive o 200x100 Standard 200x200 Detail O Not selected 200x400 Fine 1 Selected 300 x 300 Reserve IF more than one of these three bits is set to 1 the higher 400 x 400 Super Fine resolution has priority For example if both Bit O and Bit 2 are set to 1 then the resolution is setfor Bit 2 200 x 400 600 x 600 Reserve Cc CHEN Bit Switches This setting selects mm inch conversion for mail transmission O Off No conversion 1 On Conversion When on set to 1 the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters Unlike
206. is 6 e If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages L count is 6 T LSize Scan PGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs Large size paper A3 DLT scanned for fax transmission is not counted These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display F LSize Scan PGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of large pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs S LSize Scan PGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only Large size paper A3 DLT scanned for fax transmission are not counted These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display ADF Org Feeds 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side scanning Number of front sides fed for scanning With an ADF ARDF that can scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning With an ADF ARDF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up 145 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Number of rear sides fed for scanning With an ADF ARDF that can scan
207. is setting is not effective in V 34 communicatio PSTN cable equalizer V 8 V 17 rx mode External 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Keep this bit at 1 Parameter selection for dial tone Q This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone detection detection 1 This uses the specific parameter adjusted with SRAM Normal parameter 69ECBEH 69ECDEH Select this if the dial tone cannot be 1 Specific parameter detected when the Normal parameter is selected G3 Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch OA SP No 1 105 011 277 2 8 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Maximum allowable carrier drop during image data reception Bit 1 O Bit O O 200 These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time Bit 1 O Bit O 1 400 Try using a longer setting if error code 0 22 is frequent Bit 1 1 BitO O 800 Bit 1 1 Bit 1 Reserved Select cancellation of high speed RX if carrier signal lost while receiving This switch setting determines if high speed receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when receiving during non ECM mode 1 On This bit set the maximum interval between EOL end of Maximum allowable frame interval line signals and the maximum interval between ECM during image data reception 9 9 frames from the other end 05s T5 Try using a longer setting
208. ission 10 bytes 1 4 bytes with PC based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames Forbid CED AMsam output Do not change this setting Default Off unless Off communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam 1 On Forbid output transmission G3 Switch 02 SP No 1 105 003 Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only G3 protocol mode used communicate with machines that send T 30 standard Standard and non standard frames only 1 Standard only 1 Disables NSF NSS signals these are used in non standard mode communication Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for Disabled 1 Enabled details about Short Preamble G3 Switch 03 SP No 1 105 004 271 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 V 8 protocol O Disabled 1 Enabled ECM frame size 256 bytes 1 64 bytes CTC transmission conditions O After one PPR signal received 1 After four PPR signals received ITU T standard Modem rate used for the next page after receiving a negative code RTN or PIN No change 1 Fallback O The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame twice 1 Before sending DCS the machine will wait for the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line V 8 V 34 communications will not be possible Note Do not set to O unless the line condition is always bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14 4 kbp
209. it high byte If both addresses contain FF BCD Hz tone detection is disabled lower limit low byte 6805AA Do not change the setting 6805AB 20 ms Factory setting 500 ms 6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting 3000 ms The data is coded in the same way as address 680533 Do not change the settings If both addresses contain FF Acceptabl tection f 680549 cceptable CNG detection frequency 6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for detection Acceptable Al short protocol tone 6805AF 800Hz detection frequency upper limit high byte Hz BCD tone detection is disabled Acceptable Al short protocol tone 6805B0 800Hz detection frequency upper limit low byte Acceptable Al short protocol tone 6805B1 800Hz detection frequency lower limit high byte If both addresses contain FF Hz BCD H tone detection is disabled Acceptable Al short protocol tone 6805B2 800Hz detection frequency lower limit low byte 298 NCU Parameters Detection time for 800 Hz Al short 6805B3 mu Factory setting 360 ms protocol tone P2 103 002 t 6805B4 PSTN Tx level from the modem i N 6805B4 0 5N 6805B5 3 5 dB 6805B5 PSTN 1100 Hz tone transmission level See Note 7 N6805B4 0 5N 6805B6 3 dB 6805B6 PSTN 2100 Hz tone transmission level See Note 7 m e ae 6805B8 PABX 1100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B8 dB 68
210. it 7 Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone displays Cannot detect original size 1 Receives fax messages 6800E2 H User parameter switch 18 SWUSR 12 Bit O TTI date Off 1 On Bit 1 TTI sender Off 1 On Bit 2 TTI file number Off 1 On Bit 3 TTI page number 0 Off 1 On Bits 4 to 7 Not used 6800E3 H User parameter switch 19 SWUSR 13 Bit Not used Bit 1 Journal format The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions 1 The Journal is separated into G3 1 G3 2 and G3 3 communications Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx This switch is not printed on the user parameter list O Off 1 On Bit 4 Reduction of sample images on reports to 5076 in the main scan and sub scan directions This switch is not printed on the user parameter list Technician adjustment printer switch OE bits 3 and 4 1 50 reduction Bit 5 Use of A5 size paper for reports This switch is not printed on the user parameter list O Off 1 On Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800EA H User parameter switch 20 SWUSR 14 Bit Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report Off 1 On Bit 1 Not used Bits 2 to 5 Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax LAN fax driver 215 316 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E5 H User parame
211. ite plate adjustment Displays the current value of the white plate adjustment 4687 2 Result If SP4 428 has not been done this value is O 4690 White Peek Init 4658 1 EVEN 4658 2 482 00D iow285 71 sp 4658 3 Displays the white offset value of the pre offset adjustment 4658 4 GREEN HUS BE 4658 5 BLUE 48821000 5 Displays the black offset value of the pre offset adjustment in the SBU 4902 Exposure Lamp ON O OFF 1 ON Turns the exposure lamp on or off To turn on the exposure lamp specify 1 to turn it off specify 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 4903 1 Adjusts the ADS level 4904 ADS Lower Limit 255 80 1 step 4904 1 Adjusts the ADS lower limit 4905 ADS Area Select 0 All 1 One Checks the whole area All or the specific areas 1 One to adjust the ADS level The specific areas are as follows ARDF 37 5 mm from the center e Platen Cover 15 to 90 mm from the left edge 4921 Image Adj Selec Selects which mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 are used for None 1 Text 1 2 Text 2 Photo 1 4 Photo 2 5 Photo 3 6 Special 1 7 Special 2 8 Special 3 9 Special 4 10 Special 5 0105 0 1 Selects which mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 are used for None 1 Text 1 2 Text 2 3 Photo 1 4 Photo 2 5 Special 1 Scanner Mono 0104 0 1 Selects which
212. itial settings of those network applications settings may not actually work 00r 1 O 1 step 002 On Board USB OFF 1 ON 5990 In the SP mode press Copy Window to move to the copy screen select the paper size then press Start Select A4 LT Sideways or larger to ensure that all the information prints Press SP Window to return to the SP mode select the desired print and press EXECUTE T oo peron Shao ata NN System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 5998 Engine Memory Clear See the section Memory Clear in this chapter SP6 XXX Peripherals ADF Adjustment i DF Image Adjustment in the Adjusting Copy Image Area NOTE Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration StoS Front Regist 75 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the side to side registration for the front side of the original for ARDF mode Use the L key to select or before entering the value Leading Regist 75 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the leading edge registration for ARDF mode Use the l key to select or before entering the value Trailing Erase 3 0 to 3 0 1 5 0 1 mm step n 002 003 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ARDF mode Use the L amp I key to select or before entering the value S to S Rear Regist 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 004 Adjusts the side to side registration for the 2nd side of the original for ARDF
213. ive fusing jam alarm occurs SC559 when the machine detects three consecutive paper jams at the fusing unit 1902 Display AC Freq Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency as detected by the zero cross signal generator The displayed value is 1 5 the actual frequency 10 and lower 50 Hz 11 and higher 60 Hz at By pass Envelope 0 No 1 Yes The program dedicated to envelope printing runs when you enable this program SP1 911 001 and you select Thick Paper as the paper type of the by pass tray gt System Settings gt Tray Paper Settings gt Paper Type Bypass Tray SP2 XXX Drum 2001 CR Bias Adj 2100101500 1650 1 V s 2001 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for printing The voltage changes automatically as charge roller voltage control works The value here is the base value for the charge roller voltage control 65 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables ID sensor pattern 0 to 400 300 1 V step Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for the ID sensor pattern as part of charge roller voltage correction The charge roller voltage is obtained by adding SP2 001 002 to the value of SP2 001 001 Adjusts the width of the erased area ii Adjusting Copy 2101 Erase Margin Adj Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 0 0 to 9 0 3 0 0 1 mm step 2101 1 Leading Edge Specification 2 1 5 mm 0 0 to 9 0 4 0 0 1 mm step Traili
214. keeper Contact the network administrator Remote 7 38 terminal Check whether the remote fax is a T38 emote fax a T 38 terminal 1 terminal Remote fax switched off or busy Contact the network administrator Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth Raise the delay level e 15 Network bandwidth too narrow IPFAX SW O1 Bit O to 3 Lower the modem transmission baud rate IPFAX SW 05 o Check whether the remote fax cancelled the 16 Remote fax cancelled transmission transmission 23 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 IP Fax Reception Cannot receive by IP Address Host name gt LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection Fi is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another irewa is installe method Fax Internet Fax gt IP address of local fax registered Register the IP address Port number specitied at remote sender fax if dj Request the sender to specify the port number require Specified port number correct if required Request the sender to check the port number Contact the network administrator DNS server registered when host name TN specified on sender side The sender machine displays this error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth Network bandwidth too narrow Lower the start modem reception baud rate on
215. key on the operation panel or press appropriate number key on the 10 key pad of the operation panel Before starting the firmware update procedure always make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress Firmware Update Procedure Before beginning the following first confirm which firmware version s are currently installed in the machine with SP7 801 255 SD Card Preparation 1 Format an SD card with for example SD Formatter v1 1 Create a romdata folder on the card 2 3 Create the following folders within the romdata folder B121 B620 B622 B658 B681 B685 A Download the firmware from the server and store the files in the folder with the corresponding model code on the SD card Example File B1215540B should be stored in the B121 folder whereas files B6585902B B6585903B and B6585905B should be stored in the B658 folder Firmware Update Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card Copy the only model firmware you want 1 Turn off the main power switch If the machine is connected to a network disconnect the network cable from the copier Remove the interface cover P x 1 ps 2 With the label on the SD card facing the rear side of the machine insert the SD card into the slot 2 on the controller box Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks
216. kup battery discharged The RTC device is not detected 1 Replace the with another NVRAM with an RTC device 827 Self diagnostic Error RAM 39 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions loose connection 0201 Error is detected during a write verify Defective SDRAM DIMM check for the standard RAM SDRAM Defective controller DIMM 1 Replace the SDRAM DIMM 2 Replace the controller Defective RAM DIMM The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM incorrect or unreadable e Defective 12C bus 0202 Replace the RAM DIMM 828 Seldiagnostie Eror ROM Self diagnostie Ero ROM Error ROM Boost lap code error 0101 The boot monitor and OS program Defective ROM DIMM stored in the ROM DIMM is checked e Defective controller If the check sum of the program is 1 Replace the ROM DIMM incorrect this SC code is displayed 2 Replace the controller Self diagnostic Error Optional RAM Verify error for optional RAM 929 iud Make sure that the resident RAM is Verification error Slot 1 installed in the correct slot 0302 Make sure the optional RAM is installed in th t slot Slot Composition error Slot 1 installed in the correct slot Slot Self diagnostic error Centronic device EEE1284 connector error Loopback connector is connected but e Centronic loopback connector 1102 G check results in an error defective 1 Replace the controller
217. l Data Error Fax Error Codes Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed PC not operating correctly SMTP server operating incorrectly Network not operating correctly Destination folder setting incorrect Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed SMTP server operating incorrectly Destination folder setting incorrect Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly Software application error POP Before SMTP or SMTP authorization failed Incorrect setting for file transfer Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit for the SMTP server The send buffer is full so the transmission could not be completed Buffer is full due to using Scan to Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the same time Transmission was cancelled because the detected size of the file was too large Processing is interrupted because the user pressed Stop Update the software because of the defective software The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS due to the incorrect data Update the software because of the defective software 219 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 When a mail is divided for the mail transmission and the division number of a mail are more than the Maximu Division Number specified number the mail transmission is interrupted Error Update the softwar
218. l Set and DF Inverter Sensor DF Registration and DF Exit Sensor 116 TZ 118 JT IV 120 122 122 41253 124 125 125 127 132 132 133 134 1595 195 136 139 199 137 140 141 141 142 142 143 143 144 145 146 147 DF eed Clutch oNvusRP abes 148 d usting Cop Image if lep 49 y 49 DI Image d UES 154 5 Troubleshooting Call ciel 157 Electrical Component DEleCt6 TE 158 Card Save 159 2 RC 159 Mire Em 159 Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 sese 162 6 System Maintenance Reference SR ed Moo b IR 163 PTA c oec E LI M M eM 163 Ung NOS deed eise Ee 163 Using SP Mode IF SPF DOOS
219. l cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state 161 5 Troubleshooting Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 See Appendices for the following information e um mnl au au uu Lu Lu LUFT LP LUFT um 1 162 6 System Maintenance Reference Service Program Donotletthe user access the SP mode or the SSP mode Only service representatives are allowed to access these modes The machine operation is NOT guaranteed after any person other than service representatives accesses the SP mode SP Tables See Appendices for the following information ei Service Program Mode Tables for F SFP models D068 D069 555555 mm mm m a me ee ma ee d Using SP SSP Modes The following two modes are available e SP Mode Service Program Mode The SP Mode includes the programs that are necessary for standard maintenance work e SSP Mode Special SP Mode The SSP Mode includes SP Mode programs and some special programs You need some extra knowledge to use these special programs For details consult your supervisor 163 164 6 System Maintenance Reference Starting SP Mode 1 Type the keys as follows 9 gt O 9 0 2 Press the C key and hold it down until the SP mo
220. l jam counters When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed SP7 807 1 does not reset the following logs SP7 507 Display Paper Jam History and SP7 508 Display Original Jam History MF Error Counter Japan Only 7826 Displays the number of counts requested of the card key counter 001 Error Total reguesi for ganni total failed a power on This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected 002 Error Staple eques fora Pon failed at Bowes on This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected MF Error Counter Clear 7827 Press Execute to reset to the values of SP7826 Japan Only Display Self Diag Displays the SC codes and the number of their occurrences Each number is in the range of 0 to 9999 Resident Memory 7836 Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board Assert Info Records the location where a problem is detected in the program The data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis DFU Cope po eof Dsply Info Count Displays the total operating time or the total number of operations The time is displayed in the following format day hour minute second System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Dsply ID S Work The total of the time when the ID sensor is working Dsply Dev Counter 004 The total number of paper outputs Dsply ID Er Count The total number of ID sensor errors 7992 Reset In
221. l number 236 System Service Mode PSTN 1 Port Settings Select the line type setting for the G3 1 line IF the 001 Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line select PABX PABXIGND or PABXIFLASH 103 PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the Number G3 1 line Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive transmissions Disabled using Memory Lock on this line turn this SP on IPFAX Port Settings Iw a a a IPFAX Protocol Priority FAX SW 201 SPA XXX ROM Versions 002 007 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version Select H323 or SIP 002 065 Displays the latest 64 fax error codes 002 004 G3 1 ROM Version Displays the G3 1 modem version 237 238 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 SP5 XXX Initializing Initialize SRAM 001 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters user data in the SRAM files in the SAF memory and clock Erase All Files 001 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory Reset Bit Switches 001 Resets the bit switches and user parameters Factory setting 001 Resets the bit switches and user parameters user data in the SRAM and files in the SAF memory Reset All Bit Switches 001 Initializes all the current bit switch settings Reset Security Bit Switches Initializes only the security bit switches If you select automatic output display for the user parameter switches t
222. lation b872i105 5 Place the DF exposure glass F on the glass holder When installing the DF exposure glass make sure that the side of the DF exposure glass with two black points faces down Do not hold the Mylar strip when installing the DF exposure glass Make sure that there is no gap between the two Mylar strips and the scanner frame If there is any gap between them dust may fall into the scanner unit 52 ARDF B872 b872i106a 6 Peel off the backing G of the double sided tape attached to the rear side of the left scale guide H then install it P x 2 removed in step 4 b872i107 7 Remove the two platen stays I and bracket P x 1 each 8 The bracket is attached to the platen stay of the rear left side Make sure to remove the bracket at this time 939 2 Installation b8721108 9 Mount the DF J on the copier as shown 68721502 10 Secure the screw 11 Attach the clamp L 12 Connect two I F cables M to CN109 and CN110 on the BICU and secure the ground cable N P x 1 2 Make sure that the I F cable of ARDF is clamped between the two binds O e Reinstall the scanner left side cover removed in step 4 54 ARDF B872 b8721110 13 Cut the cutout P with nippers 14 Reinstall the rear cover and connector cover BP x 6 15 Close the right door b872i111 16 Open the ARDF 17 Place platen sheet Q on the exposur
223. le Physical address mapping Insert the SD card correctly Use another SD card Store correct data in the SD card Update controller program Update program error Replace the controller Insert the SD card correctly SD card access error Use another SD card Download data Insertthe SD card that was used when the previous update inconsistency procedure is interrupted Store the correct data in the SD card Engine program Replace BICU Operation panel program Store the correct data in the SD card Replace the operation panel board Downl t il gaa s Insert the SD card that stores the correct data Inconsistency 17 172 6 System Maintenance Reference Store the correct data in the SD card Controller program Replace the controller board Authentication error Store the correct data in the SD card You need to reinstall the program If the firmware update program is interrupted for example by a power failure keep the SD card inserted and turn the mains switch off and on The firmware update program restarts If you do not do so the message Reboot after Card insert is displayed when you turn the main switch on Test Pattern Print SP5 902 001 Executing Test Pattern Printing Specify the pattern number and press the OK key 2 Press the copy start key The copy mode is activated i Using SP and SSP Modes in
224. le Settings Available Settings is not displayed until Step 2 is done If this setting is not selected tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do the installation procedure Controller Options Seal Check and Removal d0371951 A CAUTION You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation 1 Check the box seals A on each corner of the box Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 You can see the VOID marks B when you remove each seal In this condition they cannot be attached to the box again Installation Procedure d068i016 85 86 2 Installation 1 Turn the SD card label to face A the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear a click Turn on the main power switch and then enter the SP mode Select SP5878 002 and then press Execute on the LCD Exit the SP mode after Completed is displayed on the LCD Turn off the main power switch gt i9 Be ce Remove the SD card from slot 1 Recovery from a Device Problem Controller board is defective Yes Replace the controller boa
225. led 1 Enabled 2 3 Do not change the settings Sidaa manual calibration setting 0 Off 1 On 5 Do not change the settings IP Fax Switches 1 manually calibrates for communication with a line whose current change occurs such as an optical fiber line IP Fax Switch OO SP No 1 111 001 FUNCTION COMMENIS O O 279 280 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 IP Fax Transport O TCP 1 UDP IP Fax single port selection OFF 1 ON enable IP Fax double ports single data port selection OFF 1 ON enable IP Fax Gatekeeper OFF 1 ON enable IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse O LSB first 1 MSB first IP Fax max bit rate setting Not affected 1 Affected IP Fax received telephone number confirmation No confirmation 1 Confirmation IP Fax Switch 01 Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP Fax Selects single data port Selects whether IP Fax uses a double port Enables disables the communication via the gatekeeper for IP Fax Reverses the T30 bit signal When O is selected the max bit rate does not affect the value of the DIS DCS When 1 is selected the max bit rate affects the value of the DIS DCS When is selected fax data is received without checking the telephone number When 1 is selected fax data is received only when confirming that the telephone number from the sender matches the registered te
226. lephone number in this machine If this confirmation fails the line is disconnected Bit Switches Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the Bit3 Bit2 BitO Setting IF TCP UDP is enabled on the network raise this setting on the T 30 machine Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets If only UDP is enabled increase the number of redundant packets Level 1 to 2 3 Redundant packets Level 3 4 Redundant packets Selects the preamble wait time 00 to Of There are 16 values in this 4 bit binary switch IP Fax preamble wait time setting combination Waiting time set value level x 100 ms Max Of 1500 ms Min 00 No wait time The default is IP Fax Switch 02 SP No 1 111 003 When is selected the bit signal reverse method is decided by th k de IP Fax bit signal reverse setting 0 When 1 is selected the bit signal reverse method d is decided by the internal bit switch 1 Internal bit switch setti When communicating between Fax devices LSB first is selected Modem speed Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax communication 1 No limitation SIP transport setting This bit switch sets the transport that has priority for receiving IP Fax data TCP This function is activated only when the sender has 1
227. lication O PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 427 These SPs count by binding and combining and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Other applications on sence EC C CORS oeme mma p 000 mmm p These counts SP8 421 to SP8 427 are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption Pages that are only partially printed with the n Up functions are counted as 1 page Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes 149 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables T PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications C PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application F PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application P PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application S PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application O PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 99999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications 150 Syst
228. ling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not Relay memory and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination T S to Email PGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 This SP counts by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e mail for both the Scan and document server applications S S to Email PGS 0 to 99999999 0 1 This SP counts by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e mail for the Scan application only The count for B W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD If the job is cancelled before it is stored the pages are not counted e f Scan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to 5 addresses the count is 10 the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together e f Scan to PC is used to send a 10 page document to 5 folders the count is 50 the document is sent to each destination of the SMB FTP server 155 156 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables e Due to restrictions on some devices if Scan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to a large number of destinations the count may be divided and counted separately For example ifa 10 page document is sent to 200 addresses the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations for a total of 20 T Deliv PGS Svr 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
229. lled 2 55k 17 Ib 64 g m or less original cannot be used 3 Width 139 216 mm Length 139 1260 mm 4 Width 139 216 mm Length 160 356 mm Paper Feed The copier and optional paper feed unit do not detect paper sizes The following table lists the paper sizes that the copier and optional paper feed unit can transport 1 Appendix Specifications emm X rr ot ND _ snm eee me eee ri we we Wwe x We jw OS we x1 wo jm E ea IL we we wo e p we ce me ewe wwe be nee eme 18 Supported Paper Sizes Custom Leading edge 90 216 mm Side edge 139 356 mm Symbol meanings X Can transport Cannot transport 19 1 Appendix Specifications 20 2 Appendix Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables Reset the PM counter SP7 804 001 after doing maintenance work Key AN As necessary C Clean R Replace Inspect OPTICS u w e me me e me _ wee oe eth Platen cover Dry cloth Exposure glass Dry cloth Toner shield glass Dry cloth DRUM AREA Clean toner bottle holder Transfer roller Discharge plate Paper feed roller Water or alcohol Friction pad Dry cloth Bottom plate pad Water or alcohol Registration roller Water or alcohol FUSING UNIT
230. lue ofthe gain adjustmentin the SBU 4628 4 GREEN 4628 5 BLUE 72 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 4640 SBU Offset Loop 4640 1 EVEN 10 0 1 ste Displays the number of the offset adjustment in the SBU 4640 4 GREEN 4640 5 BLUE 4641 SBU Gain Loop 4641 1 EVEN 10 0 1 ste Displays the number of the gain adjustment in the SBU 4641 4 GREEN 4641 5 BLUE 46422 ODD 003 0 1 step Displays the number of the pre offset adjustment in the n 745 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 0 Success 1 Failure Displays the result of SBU adjustment 4654 SBU Offset Adjust 4654 1 EVEN 4654 2 4942000 ass 1 4654 3 Displays the offset value of the offset adjustment in the BU 4654 4 GREEN 4554 5 BLUE 4658 SBU Gain Adjust 4658 1 EVEN 0 511 1 step Displays gain value of the gain adjustment in the SBU 4658 4 GREEN 4658 5 BLUE 4685 Gray Balance Book 4685 1 RED 46851 pos 333 256 1 sepl 4685 2 GREEN Adjusts the coefficient of the gray balance adjustment for th 4685 3 BLUE e book scanning 4686 Gray Balance DF 74 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 4686 1 RED RD too 3 286 1 4686 2 GREEN Adjusts the coefficient of the gray balance adjustment for 46863 BLUE the DF scanning 4687 White Balance 222 to 281 256 1 step 4687 1 Adjust P Adjust the correction value for the wh
231. mmunications 108 the IP fax line EN Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication 1 Communication for the IP fax line SP7 XXX Test Modes These are the test modes for PTT approval G3 1 Modem Tests G3 1 DTMF Tests G3 1 V34 S2400baud System Service Mode G3 1 V34 S2800baud G3 1 V34 S3000baud G3 1 V34 S3200baud G3 1 V34 S3429baud 241 242 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Bit Switches This section is used only for F SPF models D068 D069 ANWARNING Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations Such bits are for use only in other areas such as Japan Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual Refer to the System Parameter List printed by the machine System Switches System Switch OO SP No 1 101 001 Setthis bitto 1 before changing any dedicated transmission Dedicated transmission parameter parameters programming 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Resetthis bitto O after programming dedicated transmission parameters Bit Switches Technical data printout on the Journal 1 Instead of the personal name the following data are O Disabled listed on the Journal for each G3 communication 1 Enabled e g 0000 1 32 2 3 288 4 264 5 10100 6
232. mode Use the 2 key to select or before entering the value Sub scan Magnif 0 9 to 0 9 0 0 0 1 step 005 Adjusts the sub scan magnification for the ARDF Origin Curl Adj 0 No 1 Yes Turns on or off the skew correction at 2nd side scanning This SP is activated only when the duplex mode is selected 133 134 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 007 Adjusts the original buckle for the skew correction at 2ns side scanning This SP is activated only when SP6 006 006 is set to 1 Yes 6009 ADF Free Run 001 Performs an ARDF free run in duplex scanning mode Press ON to start press OFF to stop O3 Performs an ARDF free run ot simplex scanning mode Press ON to start press OFF to 0 6910 ADF Shading Time 60 30 1 s step Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ARDF mode Light and heat the room may affect the scanner response Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ARDF copy jobs Enables or disables the ADF hole setting When 1 Yes is selected the machine prevents feed jams of the punched originals in the ARDF SP7 XXX Data Log 7001 Total Operation Displays the total operation time total drum rotation time 7401 Total SC Counter 0 to 9999 0 1 step Displays how many times SC codes are generated 7403 SC History System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Displays the
233. mpleted 13 102 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Cer Abnml Cause Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification Normal There is no request for certification update in progress Request for certification update in progress The current certification has expired Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification Cer The ID of the request for certification Firm Updating 083 Displays the status of the firmware update Firm Up Usr Conf This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the firmware 0 85 before the firmware update execution If the option to confirm the previous version is selected a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL 08 Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during the firmware update execution CERT Macro Vsn 087 Displays the macro version of the Remote certification CERT PAC Vsn 8 Displays the PAC version of the Remote certification 103 104 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables CERT ID2 Code 089 Displays ID2 for the Remote certification Spaces are displayed as underscores _ Asterisks indicate that no Remote certification exists CERT Subject Displays the common name of the GRemote certification subject CN 7 the
234. n the fusing temperature is at the specified level or higher while the copier is recovering or starting up 2996 T Roller Cleaning 0 No 1 Yes Cleans or does not clean the transfer roller before each job Select 1 if the backside of the paper becomes unclean when output Note that the copier takes a longer time to output the first copy when you select 1 If you select the transfer roller is never cleaned Adjusts the magnification Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment The specification is 100 1 0 SP4 XXX Scanner 4008 SubScan Mag Scanner 0 9 to 0 9 0 0 0 1 step Adjusts the sub scan magnification i Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4009 Main Scan Mag Scanner 0 9 to 0 9 0 0 0 1 step Adjusts the main scan magnification i Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4010 LE Scan Regist 75 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the leading edge registration Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4011 S to S Scanner Registration 2 0 to 2 0 0 0 0 1 mm step System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Adjusts the side to side registration for scanning in platen mode i8 Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4012 Scan Erase Margin O to 9 0 1 0 0 1 mm step 4012 1 Leadin
235. nal feed in guide plate A P x 2 5 Original set sensor B x 1 hook 6 DF inverter sensor C EF x 1 hook 144 ARDF DF Registration and DF Exit Sensor 1 Open the DF left cover Original feed unit Original Feed Unit DF feed clutch S DF Feed Clutch Original feed in guide plate V7 Original Set and Inverter Sensor DF feed motor S DF Feed Motor a x X obe DF transport motor i DF Transport Motor b872r110 7 DF transport roller A x 2 gear x 2 bushing x 2 8 DF separation roller unit B 2 gear x 1 bushing x 2 9 Inverter upper guide plate C P x 4 E x 3 5 4 145 146 4 Replacement and Adjustment b872r111 10 Inverter lower guide plate D hook x 2 11 DF registration sensor E x 1 hook 12 DF exit sensor E x 1 hook DF Registration Sensor Reflector b262r508 Clean the SD registration sensor reflector A as necessary DF Feed Motor 1 DF rear cover DF Rear Cover ARDF b872r106 2 Inner cover P x 1 3 DF feed motor with bracket B F x 2 5 x 4 EP x 3 timing belt A DF feed motor C P x 2 DF Transport Motor 1 DF rear cover DF Rear Cover 2 DF feed motor DF Feed Motor B b872r107 3 DF transport motor with bracket A P x 2 spring x 1 timing belt 147 4 Replacement and Adjustment 4 DF transport motor B F x 2 DF Feed Clutch
236. ncorrect installation of the thermistor Defective fusing lamp Defective power supply unit Fusing overheat error 1 The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor is 230 C or higher for one second Fusing overheat error 2 The fusing temperature detected by the monitor circuit is 250 C or higher for one second Fusing lamp overheat error After the fusing temperature reaches the target the fusing lamp remains on for 12 seconds Unstable fusing temperature While the fusing lamp is on the fusing temperature varies 50 C or more within one second and this occurs two consecutive times Zero cross signal malfunction The zero cross signal is not detected within five seconds after the main power switch is turned on Or the zero cross signal is not detected within one second after operation begins Consecutive fusing jam The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times The paper jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly This SC is activated only when SP1159 001 is set to 1 default O SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 e Defective thermistor Defective power supply unit e Defective thermistor Defective power supply unit Defective thermistor Incorrect installation of the thermistor Defective power supply unit e Defective thermistor Incorrect installation of the thermistor Defective power supply unit Defective power supply unit Defective BICU
237. nd device symptom happens three times MF accounting device error 2 The machine is communicating with the Defective or broken line between accounting device The break signal machine and device returns 32 SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 Defective accounting device A backup RAM error is reported from the controller accounting device Defective battery in the accounting device MF accounting device error 3 634 Defective accounting device A battery voltage error is reported from controller the accounting device Defective battery in the accounting device Bi MF accounting device error 4 636 SD SD Card Eror SD Card Eror Expanded authentication module error 001 There is no expanded authentication module in the machine 1 Install the correct SD card or the file of The SD card or the file of the expanded the expanded authentication module authentication module is broken 2 Install the DESS module There is no DESS module in the machine The version of the expanded 1 Install the correct file of the expanded 002 authentication module is not correct authentication module 650 Communication error of the remote service modem Cumin M Authentication error 001 1 Check and set the correct user name SP5816 156 and password SP5816 157 004 C The authentication for the Embedded RCG M fails at a dial up connection Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem
238. nd that the left edge of the glass is aligned flush against the support ridge B on the frame Adjustment When replacing the white plate perform the Scan Auto Adjustment SP4 428 001 Scanner Unit Lens Block A CAUTION Do not disassemble the lens block The lens block is precision adjusted before shipment Do not touch the screws on the CCD The CCD is precision adjusted before shipment p P d 7 a Sw f DO uum 1 Exposure glass Exposure Glass 2 Front left cover operation panel i Operation Panel and Upper Covers 3 Release the cable from the four clamps A 4 Lens block B 7 x 4 1 flat cable Do notloosen the paint locked screws holding the lens unit in place e After installing a new lens block carry out copy adjustments Adjusting Copy Image Area Exposure Lamp Lamp Stabilizer Board Do not fold the exposure cable on the exposure lamp 99 4 Replacement and Adjustment B b130r947 1 Exposure glass Exposure Glass Front left cover operation panel Operation Panel and Upper Covers Slide the first scanner to a position where the lamp and scanner are clear of the metal lids Disconnect the lamp connector a oS Remove either or both of the following Exposure lamp B F x 1 Lamp stabilizer board C P x 2 1 flat cable Scanner Motor 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Rear sc
239. ne determines them as full mode Full mode address selection standard machines O Full mode address This machine attaches the demand of reception confirmation to a message when transmitting 1 No full mode simple mode This machine updates the reception capability to the address book when receiving Switch 05 309 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Directr transmission selection to SMTP server Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to SMTP 0 ON server 1 OFF Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings 310 Service RAM Addresses Service RAM Addresses This section is used only for F SPF models D068 D069 NCAUTION Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only 680000 H Machine code 680001 to 680004 H ROM version Read only 680001 H Revision number BCD 680002 H Year BCD 680003 H Month BCD 680004 H Day BCD 680005 H Machine code 2 check ram2 680006 to 680015 H Machine s serial number 16 digits ASCII 680016 H Language code Japanese Bit English UK Bit2 English USA Bit3 French Bit4 German Bit5 Spanish Bit Italian Bit7 Dutch Bit8 Swedish Bit9 Norwegian Bit10 Danish Bit 1 Finnish Bit12 Czech
240. ng Edge 21012 Specification 2 2 5 1 5 mm The rear trailing edge is this value plus 1 2 mm 0 0 to 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step Left side 21013 Specification 2 1 5 mm The rear left edge is this value plus 0 3 mm 0 0 to 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step Right side 21014 Specification 2 2 5 1 5 mm The rear right edge is this value plus 0 3 mm 2201 Dv Bias Adj 2201 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for printing Image density becomes higher when you specify a smaller value a greater absolute value Image density becomes lower when you specify a greater value a smaller absolute value 2 LL 220 V 1 1 260 V 0 300 V 1 H 340 V 2 HH 380 V ID sensor pattern 952 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for the ID sensor pattern The voltage applied is obtained by adding SP2 201 002 to SP2 201 1 The setting affects ID sensor pattern density which in turn affects the toner supply 66 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 2213 Outputs After NE 0 50 pages 1 20 sheets 2213 1 Setsthe number of copy print fax pages that can be made after toner near end has been detected Reduce the number of pages if the user normally makes copies with a high image ratio 2214 Develpr Initialize 22141 Initializes the TD sensor toner supply target voltage and the TD sensor gain value Execute this SP replacing the developer or the TD sensor ID Error Analy
241. ngs Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Available Settings If this setting is disabled not selected tell the customer this setting must be enabled selected before you do the installation procedure Seal Check and Removal AY QL A d0371951 A CAUTION You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation 1 Check the box seals A on each corner of the box Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 82 Controller Options 2 IF the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 You can see the VOID marks B when you remove each seal In this condition they cannot be attached to the box again Installation Procedure A CAUTION e Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You must install the DataOverwriteSecurity unit in SD Card slot 1 However the Postscript option and others are also installed in SD Card slot 1 You must do the SD Card Appli Move procedure first if you want to install the Data Overwrite Security unit 1 Turn off the main power switch if the machine is turned on 2 Disconnect the network cable if it is connected d068i016
242. ngs are saved in the Most of them return to the default values when you execute SP5 801 002 CTL indicates that the data is contained in NVRAM on the controller board Service Program e DFU The program is for design factory use only Do not change the settings e Brackets 1 The brackets enclose the setting rage default value and minimum step with unit Minimum to Maximum Default Step 165 6 System Maintenance Reference Using SP Mode F SPF D068 D069 NVRAM Data Upload Download Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card Follow this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced 1 Before switching the machine off execute SP 5990 1 SMC Print You will need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails Turn off the main power of the copier Remove the interface cover P x 1 Insert the SD card into the service slot 2 then turn on the main power of the copier Execute SP 5824 1 NVRAM Data Upload then press the Execute key e When uploading is finished a file is coped to an folder on the SD card The file is saved to the path and filename NVRAM lt serial number NV Here is an example with Serial Number BO700017 NVRAM B0O700017 NV pl um gt 6 In order to prevent an error during the download be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded saved
243. nsor output is adjusted to this value during the TD sensor initial setting process This SP is effective only when SP2 921001 is o 1 n or ad 2927 ID Sensor Control 0 No 1 Yes 2927 1 Determines whether the ID sensor signal is referenced or not for the toner density control Keep the default value in usual operations Clears the following messages and counters without supplying the toner Toner near end message Toner end message Toner near end counter Toner end counter Do not use this SP in usual operations When the toner in the development unit is abnormally insufficient the drum may attract the toner carrier to its surface The toner carrier damages the drum surface 2929 Adjust the upper or lower Vref limit 178 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 0 80 03 50 320 0 01V sep DFU 0 8010 3 50 070 0 01V sep DFU Adjusts the temperature threshold The ID sensor signal is not referenced when the fusing temperature is at the specified level or higher while the copier is recovering or starting up 2996 T Roller Cleaning 0 No 1 Yes Cleans or does not clean the transfer roller before each job Select 1 if the backside of the paper becomes unclean when output Note that the copier takes a longer time to output the first copy when you select 1 If you select O the transfer roller is never cleaned 2998 Adj
244. nstalled 028 BK type O3O Duplex Installed Installed Not installed 032 Main M Lock Locked Not locked 033 Polygon M Lock Locked Not locked 035 Total CO Install Installed Not installed 200 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 _ _ LAC NN Om _ Available Paper Feed Unit 00 Noe 1 tray paper feed unit Output Check SP5 804 Conducting Output Check A CAUTION To prevent mechanical or electrical damage do not keep an electrical component on for a long time 1 Select SP5 804 2 Select the number see the table below corresponding to the component 3 Select ON 4 To stop the operation select OFF 201 202 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Output Check Table KL CORN When checking Fan Motor High 005 or Fan Motor Low 006 note the following System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 These motors may not respond when the fusing temperature is high Selecting ON checks that one of these motors normally operates Selecting OFF turns off the motor that you have started by selecting ON However this does not guarantee that the motor normally stops during normal operation Printer Service Program Mode Table 1005 Display Version Displays the version of the controller firmware O Link with Doc 1 On Enables and disables the document server When you select O
245. o 9 or a capital letter A to Z for the first four characters of a serial number and you can specify a digit in the other seven characters not capital letters Serial Number and NVRAM Serial numbers are stored in the NVRAM before shipment and are not cleared by any program You must specify a serial number after you replace the Memory Clear Basic and GDI Model This model the machine without the controller box stores all the data in the NVRAM on the BICU The data is cleared by SP5 801 002 for exceptions see Exceptions SP5 801 002 clears most of the settings and counters stored in the NVRAM on the BICU the values return to their default values However the following settings are not cleared e SP5 807 Area Selection e SP5 811 001 Serial Num Input gt Code Set SP5 812 001 Service TEL gt Telephone e SP5 812 002 Service TEL gt Facsimile e SP5 907 001 Plug amp Play SP7 Data Log e SP8 History Initializing Memory Data Use SP5 801 002 after you have replaced the BICU or when the BICU data is corrupted When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed When you have replaced the controller NVRAM or when the controller NVRAM data is corrupted use SP5 801 001 Executing Memory Clear 1 Upload the data to a flash memory card NVRAM Data Upload Download 2 Print out all SMC data lists 8 SMC
246. o the paper tray unit s b046i517 40 Paper Tray Unit 7 Stick on the appropriate tray number decal s and paper size decal s at the locations indicated in the illustration 4 42 2 Installation Paper Tray Unit Heater The paper tray unit heater is installed only for the first paper tray unit Accessory Check Confirm that you have the accessories listed below 1 Grounding wire 2 Relay harness 3 Clamps A Ferrite core 5 Heater fastening screws 6 PTU fastening screws 7 Grounding screw 8 Decal for copier 9 Decal for paper tray unit 10 Tie wrap Paper Tray Unit Heater b046i518 Installation Procedure A CAUTION e Unplug the main machine s power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove the paper tray unit from the copier if it is already installed 2 Remove the paper trays from the copier and from the paper tray unit 43 2 Installation b0461519 3 Remove the ground screw 1 at the rear of the paper tray unit 4 Fasten the heater 2 and the supplied ground wire 3 to the paper tray unit P x 3 Note that 1 is the ground screw you removed in the previous step and 4 and 5 are the two supplied heater fastening screws Be sure to position the ground wire 3 and heater harness 6 so that they are out of the way of the copier when you set it on the paper tray unit 5 Set the copier on the paper tray unit
247. om the IC card to the flash ROM To execute this SP 1 turn off the main power switch 2 insert the IC card 3 press the power key and hold it down and 4 turn on the main power switch while you keep holding the power key The copier reads the software program from the IC card if you turn on the copier like this The SP mode is automatically activated 189 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 5901 1 Executes the free run Press ON to start press OFF to stop 5902 1 Test Pattern Print in this section 5907 Plug amp Play Setting Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function These names are stored in the NVRAM When the NVRAM data is corrupted select these names once again Use the right arrow or left arrow key to scroll through the list of brand names To select a brand name press the OK key An asterisk indicates which manvfacture is currently selected 5912 PCU Alarm Counter Printout 0 to 255 45 1 step Specifies the PCU alarm level The PCU alarm is issued when the following condition is met PAc x 1000 gt PCUc where PAc is the value specified in this SP and PCUc is the PCU counter When you specify zero the PCU alarm is deactivated 5990 SMC Print 59902 5 5990 3 User Program SMC Print in this section 5990 4 Logging Data SP6 XXX Peripherals ADF Adjustment DF Image Adjustment in the Adjusting Copy Image Area NOTE
248. om the by pass tray Off Regist Duplex 7 504 60 Paper does not reach the registration sensor during reverse side printing for duplex printing On Regist SN 7504 70 Paper is caught at the registration sensor On Exit SN 7504 120 Paper is caught at the exit sensor previous page Off Exit SN 7504 121 Paper does not reach the exit sensor On Exit SN 7504 122 Paper is caught at the exit sensor Off Dup Inverter 7504 123 Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor from the registration roller On Dup Inverter 7504 125 Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor 193 194 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Counter Each O Jam 0 to 9999 1 step Displays the total number of original jams by location These jams occur when the original does not activate the sensors 7505 Note e Lag Jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time Late Jam occurs because paper fails to arrive at the prescribed time 215 Inverter 7507 Dsply P Jam Hist Displays the copy jam history the most recent 10 jams Sample Display D MN DATE Mon Mar 15 11 44 50 2000 men where 007 CODE is the SP7504 number see above SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex TOTAL is the total jam error count SP7502 E NN DATE is the date the jams occurred O10 Latest 9 os System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 pou Wa e we e je
249. omen Geil ronwa 47 A4 Gradation Patches 1 128 Grades 48 A4 Gradation Patches 2 128 Grades 49 Trimming Area 4 roe i L eee _ 183 184 6 System Maintenance Reference 63 S2M Argyle Pattern 64 S2M Argyle Pattern Image 65 S2M Grid Pattern S2M Grid Pattern Image 67 S2M Argyle Pattern S2M Argyle Patten Image Engine Grid Pattern 70 Engine Argyle Pattern 1 The PCI is available to the models with the controller box 2 The original image on the exposure glass is printed behind the test pattern SMC Print SP5 990 SP5 990 outputs machine status lists 1 Select SP5 990 2 Select a menu e 001 002 SP 003 User Program 004 Logging Data or 005 Big Font The output given by the menu Big Font is suitable for faxing 3 Press the Execute key e The copy mode is activated i Using SP and SSP Modes in this section Specify copy settings and press the m key The machine status lists its output 4 To return to the SP mode press the 9 key Serial Number Input SP5 811 001 Specifying Characters SP5 81 1 001 specifies the serial number For the basic model the machine without the controller box you use the numeric keypad A serial number consists of 1 1 characters You can change each character by pressing one of the first 11 keys on the numeric keypad Using SP Mode Basic D067 D072 You can specify a digit O t
250. on the NCU parameter settings and communication parameter RAM O7 Finland 18 Singapore addresses 08 Ireland 19 Malaysia Cross reference 09 Norway P NCU country code SP No 2 103 001 for G3 1 System Switch 10 SP No 1 101 017 0000 System Switch 10 SP No 1 101 017 0000 10 SP No 1 101 017 Threshold N x 128 KB 256 KB N can be between 00 FF H Default setting O2 H 512 KB Threshold memory level for parallel memory transmission System Switch 11 SP No 1 101 018 248 Bit Switches TTI printing position Superimposed on the page data Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that the 1 Printed before the data leading customer considers to be important G3 transmissions edge 2 7 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 12 SP No 1 101 019 FUNCTION COMMENTS TTI O8 to 92 BCD mm Input even numbers only TTI printing position in the main scan This setting determines the print start position for the TTI from oe the left edge of the paper If the is moved too far to the right it may overwrite the file number which is on the top right of the page On an A4 page if the TTI is moved over by more than 50 mm it may overwrite the page number System Switch 13 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 14 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 15 SP No 1 101 022 FUNCTION COMMENTS Going into
251. onditions Application function selection error Software for that application is defective Anoption required by the application The application selected by a key press RAM DIMM board is not installed on the operation panel doesnotstartor Too complicated nest of the fax group ends abnormally address 1 As for the fax operation problem simplify the nest of the fax group address Application start error Software for that application is defective After switching the machine on the An option required by the application application does not start within 60 s RAM DIMM board is not installed No applications start or end normally Check the setting of SP5875 001 If the setting is set to 1 OFF change it to OFF 48 SC Tables Basic D067 D072 SC Tables Basic D067 D072 Summary There are four levels of service call conditions To prevent possible damage the machine does not P P 9 Activate the SP mode and turn the operate until the service representative resets the SC main power switch off and on code Turning the main power stitch off and on resets the SC Turn the main power switch off and code if the erroris caused by incorrect sensor detection on The machine operates as usual excluding the unit Turn the main power switch off and related to the service call on The SC history is updated The machine operates as No SC code is displayed Only th
252. one minute e Defective controller board Memory address error Inconsistency between the BICU The BICU does not receive the memory firmware and the controller firmware address report from the controller within Defective BICU one minute Defective controller Polygonal mirror motor error Defective polygon mirror motor The polygon mirror motor does not reach jose decem the operating speed within 1O seconds polygonal mirror motor and the BICU Or the polygon mirror motor remains out Defective cable between the BICU of the operating speed for 0 2 second after and the polygon mirror motor reaching the operating speed Defective BICU No laser writing signal F GATE error Defective BICU The poling module does not detect the laser ME Loose connection on the fax controller writing signal F GATE asserting after the or the printer controller laser crosses 5 mm from the start point on edumaa Defective fax controller or printer controller Charge roller current leak Defective charge roller The polli dule detect t leak Defective high voltage supply board of the charge roller Loose connection of the PCU 92 SC Tables Basic D067 D072 Toner bottle not installed Loose connection between the LD unit and the BICU The main scan synchronization detector Defective cable between the BICU does not detect the laser signal for 0 5 and LD unit second LD unit out of position Defe
253. only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set are set to User selectable to User selectable The default setting is 24 hours System Switch O4 SP No 1 101 005 FUNCTION COMMENTS Printing dedicated tx parameters on 1 Each Quick Speed dial number on the list is printed with Quick Speed Dial Lists the dedicated tx parameters 10 bytes each Disabled The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed dedicated tx parameters 34 bytes of data are printed the other 24 1 Enabled bytes have no use for service technicians System Switch 05 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 06 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 07 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 08 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 09 SP No 1 101 010 FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change these settings E Communications that reached phase C message tx rx Inclusion of communications on the of the T 30 protocol are listed on the Journal Journal when no image data was l 1 Communications that reached phase A call setup of T exchanged 30 protocol are listed on the Journal This will include O Disabled 1 Enabled telephone calls Error reports will not be printed Automatic error report printout 1 Error reports will be printed automatically after failed O Disabled 1 Enabled communicati
254. only when SP5508 004 is setto 1 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Freq Jam of Time 0210 10 5 1 step Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 Door Open Time 03 to 30 10 1 minute step OTS Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 With Remote in use these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error occurs If this SP is switched off the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs 5515 EIC ND Machine Information Supply Automatic Order O or 1 O 0 Off 1 On Supply Management Report Jam Door Open Call Dor 1 17 0 Off 1 On Memory Clear 5801 Before executing any of these SP codes print an SMC Report All Clear OOT Initializes items SP5801 002 to 014 below Turn the main power switch off and on after executing this SP 003 Clears the system settings 95 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 004 Clears IMH data DFU E EN 005 Clears MCS data DFU cow Clears the copy application settings 007 Clears the fax application settings ED gt Clears the printer application settings Clears the scanner application settings we DE 010 Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails and
255. ons 245 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Printing of the error code on the error report 1 Error codes are printed on the error reports No 1 Yes Power failure report 1 A power failure report will be automatically printed after Disabled 1 Enabled the power is switched on if a fax message disappeared from the memory when the power was turned off last Conditions for printing the protocol This switch becomes effective only when system switch dump list bit 6 is set to 1 Print for all communications 1 Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol dump 1 Print only when there is a list only for communications with errors communication error Priority given to various types of remote terminal ID when printing This bit determines which set of priorities the machine uses reports O RTI gt CSI gt Dial label gt Tel Number 1 Dial label gt Tel number gt RTI gt CSI System Switch OA SP No 1 101 011 FUNCTION COMMENTS 4 Dialing on the ten key pad Prevents dialing from the ten key pad while the external when the external telephone is telephone is off hook Use this setting when the external off hook telephone is not by the machine or if a wireless telephone Disabled is connected as an external telephone 1 The user can dial on the machine s ten key pad when when listing remote terminal names on reports Dial Label The name sto
256. or D068 D069 System Service Mode Only for F SPF models D068 D069 SP1 XXX Bit Switches agr Bit Switches ECKEN CNN System Switch Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option 001 032 00 Bit Switches Switch Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax 001 016 00 option ug Bit Switches Printer Switch 001 016 00 OF Change me bit switches for printer settings for the fax option P Bit Switches Communication Switch Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax 001 032 00 option ug Bit Switches G3 1 Switch Change the bit switches for the protocol settings ofthe standard 001 016 00 0F G3 board 6 Bit Switches 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 IP fax Switch 111 Change the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters 001 016 00 OF ur Bit Switches SP2 XXX RAM Data RAM Read Write 2 101 597 Change RAM data for the fax board directly 4 Service RAM Addresses Memory Dump 102 Print out RAM data for the fax board 001 G3 1 Memory Dump ug Service RAM Addresses G3 1 NCU Parameters 103 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board 6 NCU Parameters SP3 XXX Tel Line Settings Service Station 101 Enter the fax number of the service station Serial Number 102 Enter the fax unit s seria
257. ority This bit determines which identifier RTI or CSI is displayed on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 non O RTI 1 CSI standard mode File No printing O Enabled 1 File numbers are not printed on any reports 1 Disabled If authorized reception is enabled but the user has stored Action when authorized reception is no acceptable sender or CSIs the machine will not be enabled but authorized RTIs CSIs able to receive any fax messages A are not yet programmed IF the customer wishes to receive messages from any sender All fax reception is disabled that includes an RTI or CSI and to block messages from 1 Faxes can be received if the senders that do not include an RTI or Col change this bit to 1 n then enable Authorized Reception sender has an RTI or CSI Otherwise keep this bit at O default setting System Switch 1F SP No 1 101 032 FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change the settings Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want to have memory fills up a report in these cases O Enabled 1 Disabled Memory tx Memory storage report Parallel memory tx Transmission result report EM When an original jams or the SAF memory overflows Report printout after an original jam during scanning a report will be printed during SAF storage or if the SAF Received fax print start timing The machine prints each page immediately after the G3 recept
258. orrect D S 4 Hot roller C 2 C rings 1 spacer 1 gear 2 bushings 1 cover D Reassembling Be sure that The fusing lamp is positioned correctly The fusing lamp does not touch the internal part of the hot roller 107 4 Replacement and Adjustment Thermoswitches and Thermistor b130r913 1 Hot roller assembly Hot Roller amp Fusing Lamp 2 Thermoswitches P x 2 for each 3 Thermistor F x 1 Reassembling Make sure of the following That the thermistor is in contact with the hot roller That the hot roller turns smoothly Do not recycle a thermoswitch that is already opened Safety is not guaranteed if you do this 108 Fusing Pressure Roller 1 Separate the fusing unit into two sections i Hot Roller Stripper Pawls 2 Fusing entrance guide A F Two springs B C Two pressure arms D E Bushing F p Ao dm Pressure roller G 109 4 Replacement and Adjustment Checking the NIP band You can check the nip band to see if the fusing unit is in a good condition especially if the hot roller and pressure roller are correctly installed 1 Activate the SP mode Select SP1 109 001 Specify 1 Press the OK key Press the key The copy mode is activated Place an OHP sheet on the by pass tray Qu dv gt S Press the key The copier feeds the OHP sheet and stops it between the hot roller and the pressur
259. ou specify a language that is inconsistent with your local model 5811 Machine No Setting 9 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Code Set 001 Machine No Setting in this section 5812 Service TEL Telephone Sets the telephone number for a service representative This number is printed on the Counter List which can be printed with the user s Counter menu This can be up to 20 characters both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative This number is printed on the Counter List This can be up to 20 characters both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables Enter the number and press StringIn key Press the Clear modes key to delete the telephone number Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency Enter the number and press H Press the Clear modes key to delete the telephone number Selects the remote service setting Oto2 2 1 step 001 I F Setting Remote service off 1 CSS remote service on 2 Remote service on 98 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service Oor 1 0 1 step O Start of the service 1 End of the service CE Call This SP is activated only when SP 5816 001 is set to 2 Enables or disables the remote service function Function Flag Oor 1
260. overage pages output by the machine These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement of their compliance with ISO Standards 8 941 oes Engine operation time Does not include time while controller is Operation Time saving data to HDD while engine is not operating Engine not operating Includes time while controller saves data Standby Time to HDD Does not include time spent in Energy Save Low Power or Off modes Includes time while the machine is performing background Energy Save Time Hu printing Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on Includes Low Power Time e uns time while machine is performing background printing Includes time while machine is performing background printing Off Mode Time Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches Total down time due to SC errors Total down time due to paper jams during printing Total down time due to original jams during scanning 00 002 003 004 005 0 08 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Supply PM Unit End Total down time due to toner end 8 999 Displays the user setting counter for administrator afr RN 003 Copy BW 007 Printer BW 010 FaxP BW 013 Duplex 015 BW 017 Cvr BW Pages 101 SedTIl FC 102 SendTtl BW 103 FaxSend 104 Fa
261. parate correctly This SP can prevent this Shift value 0 0 to 1 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 2906 1 Changes the interval of the image position shift specified by SP2 906 001 2908 Forced Toner Supp Supplies the toner to the development unit The processing stops under either of the 29062 following conditions The toner density in the development unit reaches the standard level The processing has continued for two 2 minutes 2915 Polygon Idling 0 None 1 158s 2 25s 177 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Specifies the polygon mirror motor idling time The polygon mirror motor starts its operation when an original is set a key is pressed or the platen cover or DF is opened The motor stops if no manual operation is performed for the specified time When you set O the motor does not stop while the copier is in the standby status 2921 Toner Supply Mode O Sensor 1 1 Sensor 2 DFU 29211 Selects the toner supply mode Keep the default setting as long as the TD sensor is working 2922 Toner Supply Time 0 1 to 5 0 0 6 0 1 s step Adjusts the toner supply time The toner supply motor remains on for the specified time To validate this setting select in SP2 921 001 Specify a greater value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas 2926 Standard Vt 0 00 to 5 00 2 50 0 01 V step DFU Adjusts Vts the Vt value for new developer The TD se
262. plication The application Copy Fax Scan Print used to DesApl store the job on the document server for example Dev Counter Development Count no of pages developed Dup Duplex Duplex printing on both sides Emul Emulation FC Full Color Post print processing i e finishing punching stapling etc GenCopy Generation Copy Mode System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Get Print Counter For jobs 10 pages or less this counter does not count up GPC For jobs larger than 10 pages this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 e g for an 1 1 page job the counter counts up 11 10 71 IFax Internet Fax Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI e g border ImgEdt i removal adding stamps page numbers etc Black Local Storage Refers to the document server LSize Large paper Size Magnification MC One color monochrome NRS Remote which allows a service center to monitor machines NRS remotely Remote is used overseas CSS is used in Japan Original for scanning OrgJam Original Jam Print Job Manager Desk Top Editor A pair of utilities that allows print jobs Palm 2 to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network and allows files to moved around combined and converted to different formats Personal Computer Pages A page is the total scanned surface of the original Duplex pages
263. power switch O Oc KR Print out the configuration page User Tools Counter gt Printer Features gt List Test Print and then check that this device is detected If reception is poor you may need to move the machine Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that could generate a strong magnetic field Position the machine as close as possible to the access point 75 76 2 Installation SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802 1 1a g Wireless LAN The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 802 1 1a g me owe a 5840004 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting 5840006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country 5840007 Channel MIN Sets minimum range channel settings allowed for your country 5840011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 5840 018 SSID Check Used to check the SSID 5840020 WEP Mode Used to display the maximum length of the string that can be used for the WEP Key entry IEEE 1284 Installation A CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below Accessories Controller Options Installation Procedure d068i017 1 Remove the interface cover A F x 2 Install the IEEE 1284 board into I F slot B P x 2 Turn on the main power switc
264. pression method Transmission Change the setting when communication problems occur Basic mode priority using JBIG compression 1 Optional mode priority Communication Switch O1 SP No 1 104 002 FUNCTION COMMENIS If this bit is set to O ECM is switched off for all ECM communications Off 1 On In addition V 8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off automatically 265 266 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Maximum printable page length available Bit 7 O Bit 6 No limit The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre message protocol exchange Bit 7 O Bit 6 1 B4 364 in the DIS NSF frames Bit 7 1 Bit 6 O A4 297 mm Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Not used Communication Switch 02 SP No 1 104 003 FUNCTION COMMENTS IF there are more consecutive error lines in the received page than the threshold the machine will send a negative response The Low and High threshold values depend on the sub scan resolution and are as follows G3 Burst error threshold 100 dpi 6 L gt 12 H Low 1 High 200 dpi 12 L 24 H 300 dpi 18 L 36 H 400 dpi 24 L 48 H 0 5 1 10 ratio RTN will be sent to the other end Treatment of pages received with errors during G3 reception Deleted from memory without Pages received with errors are not printed printing 1 Printed O The next page will be sent even
265. quipped machine switching power off and on may cause loss of data stored the memory 23 24 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Engine SC Code Descriptions Exposure Lamp Error The scanner has scanned the white plate but cannot detect the white level The scanner home position sensor does not detect the scanner leaving the home position The scanner home position sensor does not detect the scanner coming back to the home position Defective exposure lamp Defective exposure lamp stabilizer Defective exposure lamp connector Unclean scanner mirror Scanner mirror out of position Defective SBU board Defective SBU connector Lens block out of position Incorrect position or width of white plate scanning i SP4 01 5 Defective scanner home position sensor Defective scanner drive motor Defective scanner home position sensor connector Defective scanner drive motor connector Defective BICU board Defective scanner home position sensor Defective scanner drive motor Defective scanner home position sensor connector Defective scanner drive motor connector Defective BICU board SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 SBU black level correction error The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the black level three times at the pre offset adjustment The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the black level ten Defective SBU board times at the PGA adjustment
266. r Defective BICU board SC Tables Basic D067 D072 SBU black level correction error The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the black level three times at the pre offset adjustment 141 The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the black level ten Defective SBU board times at the PGA adjustment The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the black level ten times at the offset adjustment SBU white black level correction error Defective exposure lamp 142 The automatic SBU adjustment has failed Unclean white plate to correct the white level ten times at the Incorrect position or width of white adjustment plate scanning S SP4 015 Defective SBU board Communication Error between BICU and SBU Loose connection of the flat cable between the BICU and the SBU 144 The BICU cannot correctly establish Defective flat cable between the BICU communication with the SBU and the SBU Defective BICU Defective SBU Defective exposure lamp The white levels of the white plate and the Unclean white plate 145 white paper are extraordinarily different Incorrect position or width of white during the Scan Auto Adjustment plate scanning i SP4 01 5 SP4 428 001 Defective BICU board Defective SBU board 51 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions Image transfer error Scanned images are not transferred to the Defective BICU board controller memory within
267. r Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program 040 Parts Alarm Counter Print O64 Normal Count Print 065 User Code Counter 066 Key Operator Counter 067 Contact List Print 069 Heading print O71 Heading3 print O72 Group List Print 128 ACC Pattern 129 User Color Pattern or 160 ACC Pattern Scan The output given by the menu Big Font is suitable for faxing 3 Press the Execute key GW machine The machine status list is output To return to the SP mode press the 9 key ID Sensor Error Analysis SP2 221 The image quality may become very bad when the ID sensor does not operate properly However there is no such SC code that indicates ID sensor malfunction instead SP2 221 shows you some information on the ID sensor Check this information when the image quality is not very good The table lists the information shown with SP2 221 ID Sensor Error Analysis Error condition Possible cause Remarks ID sensor defective SP2 221 1 Vsg Vsg lt 2 5V or ID dirt VG in the display Vsg Vsp lt 1 00V penes SUE Drum not charged Toner density very low SP2 221 2 Vsp Vsp gt 2 5V or VP in the display Vsg Vsp 1 00V ID sensor pattern not created 177 178 6 System Maintenance Reference Vsg lt 3 5V ID sensor defective P SP2 221 3 Power Ower source PW in the display when HOUR power D sensor dirty cone ID sensor 979 is applied light Drum not get charged
268. r open Right Door Switch Right door open CNxxx The connector on the BICU board N SN DF CN103 Exit Sensor Paper jam W DF CNxxx The connector on the DF connection board SN The connector on the sensor SW The connector on the switch PCU The connector on the PCU Blown Fuse Conditions All of these fuses are on the power supply unit Electrical Component Defects 120V 220 240V BICU LED Display M00 LED2 LED2 blinks in normal operation 61 4 Appendix Electrical Component Defects 62 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Service Mode Tables SP1 XXX Feed D LE Registration 9 0 to 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 1001 1 All Trays Adjusts the leading edge registration WP Adjusting 1001 2 Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 1002 S to S Regist 9 0 to 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 1002 1 IstT 000 Adjusts the side to side registration Adjusting Copy 1002 2 2nd Tray Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment SP1 002 001 is applied to all trays 1002 3 3rd Tray SP1 002 002 003 and 005 adjusts the difference from SP1 002 001 Adjusts the side to side registration of the 2nd side in 1002 6 Duplex duplex copying The 1st side is adjusted by SP1 002 001 through 005 2 Adjusts the amount of paper buckle on the registration Paper Feed Timing voller 63 64 5 Appendix S
269. r setting for the external line can be entered manually including commas Bial Up User Bial Up User User Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up Follow these rules when setting a user name e Name length Up to 32 characters e Spaces and allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks Dial Diol Up Password _ _ _ __ Diol Up Password _ _ _ __ Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up Follow these rules when setting user name Name length Up to 32 characters e Spaces and allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks Phone Number Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where embedded RCG M is connected This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls Limit 24 numbers numbers only Ans Timing Adj When the Call Center calls out to a embedded RCG M modem it sends a repeating ID tone 1 This SP sets the time the line remains open to send these ID tones after the number of the embedded RCG M modem is dialed up and connected O to 24 1 1 step The actual amount of time is this setting 2 sec For example if you set 2 the line will remain open for 4 sec 106 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 This is the number of the dial up access point for embedded RCG M If no setting is done for this SP code then
270. r955 1 Paper tray 2 Shaft A x 1 3 Remove either or both of the following Paper feed roller B Friction pad C 4 Replacement and Adjustment Paper End Sensor 1 Paper tray 2 Open the right door 3 PCU er PCU 4 Paper end sensor A EX x 1 Registration Sensor 1 Paper tray 2 Open the right door 3 Open the paper guide A Remove the paper guide Clip x 1 if you have difficulty removing the registration sensor 116 Paper Feed 4 Registration sensor feeler B 5 Registration sensor C EH x 1 e Disconnect the connector CN127 D if you have difficulty removing the registration sensor Bypass Paper End Sensor b130r958 A 1 Right door Right Door 2 Sensor compartment A 3 Bypass paper end sensor B EF x 1 117 4 Replacement and Adjustment Bypass Feed Roller A b130r959 1 Right door Right Door 2 Turn the feed roller housing upside down A P x 2 J B E b130r960 3 Feed roller shaft B 2 snap pawls C 1 spacer D 4 Bypass feed roller E 118 Paper Feed Bypass Feed Clutch and Friction Pad B C b130r961 1 Rear cover Rear Cover Right door Right Door Disconnect the bypass feed clutch connector A CN93 Bypass feed roller housing B P x 2 Bypass feed clutch C x1 mn KR Co N b130r962 6 Bypass
271. rature or while copying Increase this value if the machine is experiencing sudden power dropouts 1107 1 Warm Up Soft Start 0 10 times 1 20 times 2 50 times 1107 2 Other Soft Start 0 10 times 1 20 times 2 50 times 3 1 time 1107 3 Soft Stop Setting 0 No 1 Yes auo Set Fusing Start 0 15 1 1 5s 2 25 1108 1 Specifies the interval for fusing temperature control 173 174 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables o Nip Band Check Conducts the nip band check Adjusting Nip Band in the section Replacement and Adjustment Fan Control Timer 30 to 60 30 1 s step Specifies the fan control time The fan motor keeps its operating speed for the specified time before changing the speed or stopping The fan control timer prevents the exhaust fan from suddenly stopping This function protects the copier from overheating Enables or disables consecutive jam detection at the fusing unit If this SP is setto 1 default consecutive fusing jam alarm occurs SC559 when the machine detects three consecutive paper jams at the fusing unit 1902 Display AC Freq Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency as detected by the zero cross signal generator The displayed value is 1 5 the actual frequency 10 and lower 50 Hz 11 and higher 60 Hz at By pass Envelope 0 No 1 Yes The program dedicated to envelope printing runs when you enable this program S
272. rd Do the Restoring the encryption key procedure If the customer has lost the encryption key do the Clearing the NVRAM procedure and initialize the NVRAM and HDD with SP mode NVRAM is defective HDD unit is defective No Replace the controller NVRAM is defective board and HDD unit Initialize the HDD unit Yes The HDD encryption unit is The HDD encryption unit is recovered cannot be recovered recovered If you did the Clearing the NVRAM procedure the data However the data stored in the HDD unit cannot be recovered stored in the NVRAM and HDD cannot be recovered d381i501 Restoring the Encryption key When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed updating the encryption key is required 1 Prepare an SD card which is initialized 2 Make the restore key folder in the SD card 3 Make an nvram_key txt file in the restore key folder in the SD card 4 Ask an administrator to input the encryption key this has been printed out earlier by the user into the nvram_key txt file 5 Remove only the HDD unit HDD Controller Options 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card storing the encryption key in the machine 8 Turn off the main power switch 9 Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into slot 1 10 Turn on the main power
273. re d0681011 1 Attach the handset bracket A P x 2 2 Remove the label from the handset cradle B 3 Attach the cradle B to the handset bracket P x 2 4 Attach the cradle to the bracket P x 2 5 Reattach the label 37 2 Installation d068i013 The bracket is an accessory of the copier 6 Setthe handset on the cradle 7 Connect the handset cable to the TEL jack and set the telephone cable A as shown above 38 Paper Tray Unit Paper Tray Unit Accessory Check Confirm that you have these accessories 2 Installation Procedure for service technicians 3 Installation Procedure for users Installation Procedure A CAUTION e Unplug the main machine s power cord before starting the following procedure b046i516 1 Remove the tape at A and the tape and cardboard at B 2 Pull the paper tray part way out of the unit remove the tape and cardboard at C and push the tray back in 39 2 Installation Set machine on the paper tray unit When installing a second paper tray unit place on the first paper tray unit before placing the copier onto the pair pf paper tray units 4 Remove the paper s tray from the paper tray unit s Load paper into the paper tray s Adjust the side and end fences as necessary If loading 8 2 x 14 paper remove the end fence and set it into the special compartment 6 Set the paper tray s back int
274. red by the user for the Quick Speed Dial number the handset is off hook On hook dial O On hook dial is disabled O Disabled 1 Enabled Do not change the factory settings 246 Bit Switches System Switch OB Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch OC Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch OD Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch OE SP No 1 101 015 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Do not change the settings 2 This machine does not have the capture function O Manual tx and rx are possible while the external handset Action when the external handset is of hook However memory tx is not possible oes off hook 1 The display stays in standby mode even when the O Manual tx and rx operation external handset is used so that other people use the 1 Memory tx and rx operation the machine for memory tx operation display remains the same Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this setting System Switch OF SP No 1 101 016 247 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Country area code for functional settings Hex 01 Germany 12 Asia 02 UK 13 Japan 03 Italy 14 Hong Kong OA Austria 15 South Africa 05 Belgium This country area code determines the factory settings of bit switches and RAM addresses 06 Denmark 17 New Zealand However it has no effect
275. reset to 3 0 after an NVRAM reset and the value can be range default step changed in O 1 mm steps with each key press Comments added for your reference This value is stored in NVRAM After a RAM reset the default value factory setting is restored Denotes Design or Factory Use Do not change this value Mode Number Function and Setting Displays the scanner NV version 1001 5 Scan NV Version This shows as following Function _ Model name _ Version System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Selects the compression type for binary picture Compression Type processing 1 MH 2 MR 3 MMR Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image Erase Margin If the machine has scanned the edge of the original create a margin O to 5 Omm 1mm step Enables or disables the network TWAIN scanner Remote Scan disable function O enable 1 disable Clears or does not clear a user information after a job User Info Release Dor 1 1 7 O Not clear 1 Clear Display or not display a Scan To Multi Media function Dor 1 17 OFF 1 ON Multi Media Func These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale or full color processing mode that can be selected with the notch settings on the operation panel Range 5 lowest ratio 95 highest ratio For the settings of the image quality see the copier SP mode table 171 1772 5
276. resses contain FF H tone detection is Country dial tone upper frequency limit deabled LOW Hz BCD Country dial tone lower frequency limit HIGH If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is Country dial tone lower frequency limit disablad LOW 680543 Country dial tone detection time If 680543 contains FF the hi for th 680544 Country dial tone reset time LOW 20 ms 680545 Country dial tone reset time HIGH 680549 68053F 680540 680541 680542 273 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 680547 Country dial tone permissible drop time 680548 Country dial wait interval LOW 680549 Country dial wait interval HIGH Time between opening or closing the DO See Notes 3 6 and 8 SP2 103 012 parameter 11 68054A relay and opening the OHDI relay See Note 3 68054B Break time for pulse dialing SP2 103 013 parameter 12 See Note 3 68054C Make time for pulse dialing SP2 103 014 parameter 13 See Notes 3 6 and 8 SP2 103 015 parameter 14 68054D Time between final OHDI relay closure and DO relay opening or closing This parameter is only valid in Europe See Note 3 and 8 SP2 103 016 parameter 15 68054E Minimum pause between dialed digits pulse dial mode Time waited when a pause is entered at SP2 103 017 parameter 68054F the operation panel 16 See Note 3 SP2 103 018 parameter 680550 DTMF tone on time 17 SP2 103 019 parame
277. rmation from the SD card 121 122 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Clear Backup Info Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine This feature does not work if the card is write protected Note After you do this SP go out of the SP mode and then turn the power off Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book BitO Checks both upper lower case characters Bit1 Japan only Bit2 to 7 Not used Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password 0 to 32 1 step Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the length of the password 0 to 32 1 step Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the length of the password Oto 32 1 step Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the length of the password 0 0 32
278. rror because the mailbox gave too much load to the machine for the operation task is full e Check the line connector 4 01 Line current was cut Check for line problems Replace the FCU or the NCU Communication failed because of an ID Code mismatch Getthe ID Codes the same and or the CSls 4 10 Closed Network or Tel No programmed correctly then resend CSI mismatch Protection The machine at the other end may be defective against Wrong Connections Storage impossible because of Temporary memory shortage a lack of memory Test the SAF memory 5 2 Memory overflow Print data error when printing a e Test SAF memory substitute rx or confidential rx e Ask the other end to resend the message message Replace an SD card or HDD Replace the FCU SAF file access error G3 ECM T1 time out during reception of facsimile data Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer G3 ECM no V 21 signal was Replace the FCU O No No received 6 02 G3 ECM EOR was received e Check the line connection r G3 ECM RTC not detected Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal Replace the FCU 2195 6 Appendix Fax Troubleshooting Guide Only For D068 D069 Check the line connection Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal G3 ECM facsimile data frame Replace the FCU not received within 18 s of CFR ine
279. rt press OFF to 6910 ADF Shading Time O to 60 30 1 s step 6 19 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ARDF mode Light and heat in the room may affect the scanner response Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ARDF copy jobs SP7 XXX Data Log 7001 Total Operation 7001 1 Displays the total operation time total drum rotation time 7401 Counter SC Total 0 to 9999 1 step 7401 1 Displays how many times SC codes are generated 7403 SC History 7403 1 Displays the histories of the latest 10 SC codes 7502 1 Displays the total number of copy paper jams 7503 Counter Orgn Jam 0 to 9999 O 1 step 7503 1 Displays the total number of original jams 7504 Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location At power on 7504 1 Paper jam occurs at power on Off Regist NoFeed 7504 10 Paper does not reach the registration sensor from a paper tray Off 1 Vertical SN 7504 11 Paper does not reach the relay sensor 192 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 On 1 Vertical SN 7504 12 Paper is caught at the relay sensor Vertical SN OFF 7504 21 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor Vertical SN ON 7504 22 Paper is caught at the vertical transport sensor Off Regist Bypass 7504 50 Paper does not reach the registration sensor fr
280. s are set for the minimum end of the range for each area Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels DFU Do not change the setting 00 to 11 00 1 binary Key 1 WEP Key Select 01 Key 2 Reserved 10 Key 3 Reserved 11 Key 4 Reserved Selects the WEP key 042 Adjusts the fragment threshold for IEEE802 11 card This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 1 1 card is installed 11g CTS to Self CTL 0101 1 1 0 0 1 043 Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 11g Slot Time CTL 0101 1 1 0 20pm 1 Sum 044 Selects the slot time for IEEE802 1 1 0103 3 1 WPA Debug Lyl CTL 1 Info 2 Warning 3 Error 045 Selects the debug log for WPA authentication application This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 1 1 card is installed 5842 GWWS Analysis DFU 116 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 m System amp other groups LSB Capture related This is a debugging tool It sets the Certification related debugging output mode of each Net 3 Address book related File process Default Bit SW 1000 0000 Machine management related Output related printing delivery FE Repository related ES Debug log output co lowe _ spam Default Bit SW 0000 og time stamp setting 0 Date Hovur Minute Second 1 Minute Second Mse
281. s in the openings B and fasten the upper screw first 69 70 2 Installation 8 9 10 13 14 Install the controller box amp x 6 Insert the bracket D into the frame The connector on the controller box engages with the connector on the BICU Install PostScript 3 as necessary A 40681510 d068i903 Remove the front left cover A amp x 2 Retain the screws and use them in the next step 12 Install the multi function panel B EB x 1 2 x 2 d068i109 Remove the panel cover A Install the printer panel B I 20 Printer Scanner Unit d068i904a For the North America model only Attach the FCC decal A at the right hand side of the USB connector on the controller box Reassemble the whole copier C d068i108 Attach the ferrite core A to the network cable and attach the cable to the copier if a network cable is used The ferrite core must be attached next to the network cable connector B Attach the Power Source OFF decal C to the under of main power switch at the left side of the machine as shown above Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch For the North America model only Perform the interface settings 1 Start the SP mode 7 72 2 Installation 21 2 Select SP5 985 001 NIC setting and change the setting value to 1 ON 3 Select SP5 985 002 USB setting and change the s
282. s or lower Keep this bit at O in most cases When using ECM in non standard NSF NSS mode the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving a PPR if the following condition is met in communications at 1 4 4 12 0 9 6 and 7 2 kbps NTransmit NResend NTransmit Number of transmitted frames NResend Number of frames to be retransmitted 1 When using ECM the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs PPR CTC These are ECM protocol signals This bit is not effective in V 34 communications 1 The machine s tx modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received This bit is ignored if ECM is being used 2 2 Bit Switches This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on Select detection of reverse polarity a the phone line applied to PSTN G3 ringing Do not in ringing Off 1 On change this setting No detection gt Outside Japan 1 Detection gt Inside Japan only G3 Switch 04 SP No 1 105 005 DN NENNEN HMM Training error detection threshold O F Hex O 15 bits If the number of error bits in the received is below this threshold the machine informs the sender that training has succeeded G3 Switch 05 SP No 1 105 006 FUNCTION COMMENTS 273 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Initial Tx modem rate wa we or ue s
283. s the number of the offset adjustment in the SBU 4640 4 GREEN 4640 5 BLUE 4641 SBU Gain Loop 4641 1 EVEN 10 0 1 ste Displays the number of the gain adjustment in the SBU 4641 4 GREEN 4641 5 BLUE 42 ODD 003 1 step Displays the number of the pre offset adjustment in the 182 System Service Mode Basic D067 D072 4646 3 0 Success 1 Failure A646 Displays the result of SBU adjustment 4654 SBU Offset Adjust 4654 1 EVEN 0 to 255 1 step 4654 3 Displays the offset value of the offset adjustment in the 4654 4 GREEN id 4654 5 BLUE 4658 SBU Gain Adjust 4658 1 EVEN 0t0511 1 ste Displays gain value of the gain adjustment in the SBU 4658 4 GREEN 4658 5 BLUE 4685 Gray Balance Book 128 03 286 1 4685 2 GREEN Adjusts the coefficient of the gray balance adjustment for th 4685 3 BLUE e book scanning 4686 Gray Balance DF 183 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 4686 1 RED 4861 D 2610388 286 1 4686 2 GREEN Adjusts the coefficient of the gray balance adjustment for 46863 BLUE the DF scanning 4687 White Balance 222 to 281 256 1 step 4687 1 Adjust P Adjust the correction value for the white plate adjustment Displays the current value of the white plate adjustment 4687 2 Result If SP4 428 has not been done this value is O 4690 White Peek Init 4658 1 EVEN 4658 2 482 00D
284. s whether certification is required before a user can use the document server O to 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the fax application O to 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 031 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan applications O to 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer applications O to 1 0 11 0 On 1 Off SDK kt pui o 10 08 ton SDK2 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the SDK application SDK3 External Auth User 9 92 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Authentication Error Code These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed System Log Disp Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user authentication failure occurs O to 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On Panel Disp Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user authentication failure occurs O to 1 1 1 1 0 Off System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 MF Keycard Japan Only Job Permit Setting Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard 1 0 1 Disabled Cancels operation if no code is input 1 Enabled Allows operation if another code is input and decrements the counter once for use of the entered code O to 9999 1 step Printout
285. sec The default is 75 seconds TA timer adjustment Adjust the T4 timer The default is 3 seconds 2 9 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 02 3 sec Bit 3 O Bit 2 1 3 5 sec Bit 3 1 Bit 2 4 sec Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 5 sec 287 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 NCU Parameters e This section is used only for F SPF models 0068 0069 The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing The factory settings for each country are also given Most of these must be changed by RAM read write SP2 102 but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming SP2 103 if SP2 103 can be used this will be indicated in the Remarks column The RAM is programmed in hex code unless BCD is included in the Unit column 288 NCU Parameters Country Area code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the country area code directly into this address or use the decimal value to program it using SP2 103 001 Country Country mme ioe ot oe 9 9m vu bem os os mm w ow wmm o D je 9 m je o 9 ow om mm o A disabled Line current is not detected if 680503 Line current drop detect time 680501 contains FF 289 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit 680504 high byte
286. sed to inform the e V 27ter V 29 transmitting terminal of the available modem V 27ter V 29 type for the machine in receive mode Voc If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabled manually V 27ter V 29 V 17 V 33 Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V33 V 34 G3 Switch 07 SP No 1 105 008 Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange PSTN cable equalizer Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific tx mode Internal Bit 1 O Bit O O None receivers Also try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the Bit 1 O BitO 1 Low following symptoms occurs Bit 1 1 Bit Medium Communication error Bit 1 1 Bit O 1 High Modem rate fallback occurs frequently This setting is not effective in V 34 communications 2 6 Bit Switches Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange PSTN cable equalizer rx mode Internal Also try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the Bit 3 O Bit 2 O None Bit 3 O Bit 2 1 Low Bit 3 1 Bit 2 Medium Bit 3 1 Bit 2 1 High following symptoms occurs Communication error with error codes such as 0 20 0 23 etc Modem rate fallback occurs frequently Th
287. server by both Scan and LS applications S Deliv PGS Svr 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by the Scan application The B W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router Server e If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes the count is not done The count is executed even if there is confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server T Deliv PGS PC 0 to 99999999 Q 1 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sentto a folder on a PC Scan 8 671 to PC with the Scan and LS applications S Deliv PGS PC 0 to 99999999 0 1 8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan to PC with the Scan application Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count If several documents are merged for sending the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast the F count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination 8 681 T PCFAX TXPGS These SPs countthe number of pages sent by PC Fax These SPs are provided for the Fax application only so the counts for SP8 681 and SP8 683 are the 8 683 F PCFAX TXPGS CTL same 0 to 99999999 0 1
288. sis ID Sensor Error Analysis SP2 221 T etis 222155 Displays Vt value 22216 Displays the Vts value 2301 Tr Current Adj i Image Transfer Current 2 1 2 020pA 1 2 2 ormai paper Y uA 2301 1 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from a paper tray Use a high setting if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper within spec from a paper tray Thick Special 27 4pA 12 2uA O20pA 1 2 2 ick Specia Saul ee Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from the by pass tray Use a high setting a if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper from the by pass tray or b if waste toner is re attracted from the drum which can occur when using transparencies 67 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables 2 4 12 2u 020pA 1 2 2 Duplex 4 uA 2301 3 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when carrying out a duplex job Use this SP if there is poor image transfer on the rear side of duplex copies 23014 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller for roller cleaning Increase the current if toner remains on the roller after cleaning Remaining toner may cause dirty background on the rear side 2802 Forced Develpr Churn Initializes the developer and checks the TD sensor output Vt The machine mixes the developer for 2 minutes while reading and displaying the Vt value Th
289. sity Sensor 12 Registration Sensor 13 Paper End Sensor 14 Toner Density Sensor 15 Bypass Paper End Sensor 18 Overview 7 Mechanical Counter 17 Front Door Safety Switch 8 Polygon Mirror Motor 18 Quenching Lamp 9 LD Unit 19 High Voltage Power Supply Board 10 Exit Sensor 20 Operation Panel Board Electrical Components 2 11 S 10 A AS DS 9 af TI b262d560 1 Duplex Motor 7 Paper Feed Clutch 2 Exhaust Fan 8 Toner Supply Clutch 3 PSU 9 Bypass Feed Clutch 4 Controller Board GW 10 Registration Clutch 5 BICU 11 Fusing Solenoid om 19 20 1 Product Information ARDF 08720101 2 Registration Sensor Overview Paper Path b130d905 21 1 Product Information Drive Layout Mainframe 6 b130d904 2 Duplex motor 8 Registration Clutch 3 Exit Roller 9 Developer Driver Gear 4 Toner Bottle Clutch 10 Drum Drive Gear 6 Paper Feed Clutch 12 Fusing Drive Gear 22 Overview ARDF b872d103 6 b872d104 1 DF Feed Motor 6 Separation Roller 2 Feed Roller 7 Transport Roller 3 Pick up Roller 8 DF Transport Motor A Inverter Roller 9 Exit Roller 5 DF Feed Clutch 10 Registration Roller DF Feed Motor Drives the feed separation pick up and transport and inverter rollers DF Transport Motor Drives the registration and exit rollers 23 24 1 Product Information Guidance for
290. size for sending Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes Bit Switches When is selected the transmission condition is PPRx 1 1 PPRx4 decided by error frame numbers When 1 is selected the transmission condition is based on the ITU T method Shift down setting at receiving negative sade Selects whether to shift down when negative codes OFF 1 ON are received IP Fax Switch 04 SP No 1 111 005 Sets the TCF error threshold level TCF error threshold 00 to Of The default is 1111 OfH IP Fax Switch 05 SP No 1 111 006 283 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Modem bit rate setting for transmission Sets the modem bit rate for transmission The default is 0110 14 4K bps Modem setting for transmission Sets the modem for transmission The default is V29 Bit 5 O Bit 4 O V29 Bit 5 O Bit 4 1 2 VI7 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 O V3A Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 Not used V34 is not supported for IP Fax communication IP Fax Switch O6 SP No 1 111 007 284 Bit Switches Modem bit rate setting for reception Sets the modem bit rate for reception The default is 0110 14 4K bps 285 286 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Modem setting for reception Sets the modem type for reception The default is 0100 V27ter V29 V17 Cw owe wm BONNER 4 7
291. ss In progress no result yet Please wait Line abnormal Cannot detect dial tone automatically Line is disconnected Insufficient electrical power supply Line classification not supported Error because fax transmission in progress ioctl occurred Other error occurred N Oo Oa KR C N Line classification still in progress Please wait Dial Push Select This SP displays the classification tone or pulse of the telephone line to the access point for embedded RCG M The number displayed O or 1 is the result of the execution of SP5816 151 However this setting can also be changed manually Oto 1 O 1 step 153 0 Tone Dialing Phone 1 Pulse Dialing Phone Inside Japan 2 may also be displayed Tone Dialing Phone 1 Pulse Dialing Phone 1OPPS 2 Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS 105 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Outline Phone The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for embedded RCG M in a system that employs a PBX internal line f the execution of SP5816 151 has succeeded and embedded RCG M has connected to the external line this SP display is completely blank If embedded RCG M has connected to an internal line then the number of the connection to the external line is displayed If embedded RCG M has connected to an external line a comma is displayed with the number The comma is inserted for a 2 sec pause The numbe
292. ss consists of a total of 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each IPv6 Gateway Address 9 This SP is the IPv gateway address referenced on Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 1 1b The IPv6 address consists of a total of 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 15 IPv Stateless Auto Setting Enables disables the stateless automatic setting for Ethernet wireless LAN operation O to 1 1 1 1 Enable Disable Determines whether each item can be set in Websys 0x0000 to Oxffff Oxffff Bit 1 NetRICOH Bit2 Vendor for consumables Bit2 15 Reserved Web Shopping Link Invisible Determines whether the NetRICOH link is displayed on the Websys top page and link page O to 1 1 1 1 Display No display Web ltem Invisible 236 113 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Web Supplies Link Invisible Determines whether the consumable vendor link is displayed on the Websys top page and link page O to 1 1 1 1 Display No display Web Link 1 Name Determines whether a name entered for URL1 is displayed on the Websys link page The name length is limited to 31 characters Web Link 1 URL Sets the URL referenced for URL linked to the Websys linked page The link name is limited to 127 characters Web Link 1 Visible Determines whether the link for URL1 is displayed on the Websys top page O to 1 1 1 1 Display No display Web Link 2 Name Determines whether a name entered for
293. switch and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash cmm memory on the controller board 11 Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status 12 Remove the SD card from slot 1 13 Reinstall the HDD unit Clearing the NVRAM When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed and a customer has lost the encryption key clearing the NVRAM is required to recover the HDD encryption unit 1 Prepare an SD card which is initialized Make the restore key folder in the SD card Make an nvram key txt file in the restore key folder in the SD card Input nvclear into the nvram key txt file Turn on the main power switch pe Sm amp v mw Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card storing the encryption key in the machine Turn off the main power switch 8 Insert the SD card that contains nvclear into slot 1 9 Turn on the main power switch and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash memory on the controller board 10 Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status 11 Remove the SD card from slot 1 12 Turn on the main power switch 13 Initialize the NVRAM SP5801 001 and HDD unit SP5832 001 with SP mode 14 The user must enable the HDD encryption unit with a user tool 87 2 Installation 88 3 Preventi
294. t 5 0 25 0 dBm Bit 7 O Bit 6 O Bit 5 1 2 35 0 dBm Progress tone detection level and Bit 7 O Bit 6 1 Bit 5 O 30 0 dBm cadence detection enable flags Bit 7 1 Bit 6 O Bit 5 40 0 dBm 68055F To Not used 680564 680565 Long distance call prefix HIGH 680565 FF 680566 Long distance call prefix LOW BCD 680566 FF 68055E Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 O 49 0 dBm Bits 2 O See Note 2 Do not change the settings For a code of O Do not change the settings 680567 to Not used 68057 1 680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency SP2 103 003 parameter range 1 upper limit 02 680573 Acceptable uu signal frequency SP2 103 004 parameter range 1 lower limit 1000 N 03 Acceptable ringing signal frequency Hz SP2 103 005 parameter 680574 E range 2 upper limit 04 amp 80575 Acceptable signal frequency SP2 103 006 parameter range 2 lower limit 05 SP2 103 007 parameter 680576 Number of rings until a call is detected 1 06 The setting must not be zero See Note 4 680577 Minimum required length of the first ring 20 ms SP2 103 008 parameter 07 296 680578 680579 68057A 68057B to 680580 68058 680582 680583 To 6805A0 6805A 6805A2 NCU Parameters Minimum required length of the second 20 SP2 103 009 parameter ms and subsequent rings 08 Ringing signal detection reset time SP2 103 010 parameter LOW 09 20 ms Ringing signal det
295. t into place Be sure to do this for all three pins 3 32 2 Installation 12 Lo 14 19 b262i112 Open the front door E Liftlever F press in on latch G and pull the bottle holder H out You do not need to pull it completely out of the machine Take a new bottle of toner and shake it several times a NT 02021301 Remove outer cap I e Do not remove the inner J Load the bottle on the holder Do not forcefully turn the toner bottle on the holder After you turn on the main power switch the copier sets the bottle in place Push the bottle holder back into the machine Press the latch K down to lock the holder Copier IM b262i903 16 Remove the padding L 17 Pull each tabbed strip M out of the PCU with one hand supporting the PCU with the other Do not pull both strips at the same time as this could damage the PCU 18 Close the front door b262i119 19 Pull out the paper tray and remove the tape securing the end fence in the compartment 20 Push the bottom plate down and then load the paper 21 Adjust the side fences If you load paper shorter than set the end fence in the correct position 33 2 Installation 22 Push the tray back into the copier b262 515 23 Attach the appropriate Brand Decal to the center N of the front door if necessary 24 Attach the appropriate tray number dec
296. ta scanned in inch format are transmitted without conversion In memory transmission data stored in the SAF memory in Inch to mm conversion during mm format are transmitted without conversion transmission Note When storing the scanned data into SAF memory Disabled 1 Enabled the fax unit always converts the data into mm format 1 The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set up protocol DIS NSF before transmission 5 Do not change the factory settings Available unit of resolution in which fax messages are received 9 For the best performance do not change the factory Bit 7 O Bit 6 mm settings Bit 7 O Bit 6 1 inch The setting determined by these bits is informed to the Bit 7 1 Bit mm and inch transmitting terminal in the pre message protocol exchange default in the DIS NSF frames Bit 7 1 Bit 1 Not used Communication Switch 1B SP No 1 104 028 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 209 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 If the PABX does not support V 8 V 34 protocol procedure Extension access code 0 to 7 to series i todisable V8 turn V 8 protocol On Off 0 On Example If O is the PSTN access code set bit O to 1 When the machine detects O as the first dialed number it automatically disables V 8 protocol Alternatively if 3 is the PSTN access code set bit 3 to
297. tail Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Cross reference Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN G3 ECM coding decoding Detective FCU error The other terminal may be defective G3 ECM PIP PIN received in The other end pressed Stop during communication reply to PPS NULL The other terminal may be defective Check for a noisy line G3 ECM ERR received Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines See code 6 05 Check for line noise G3 ECM error frames still Adjust the tx level use NCU parameter O1 or the received at the other end after dedicated tx parameter for that address all communication attempts at 2400 bps Check the line connection Defective remote terminal V 21 flag detected during high DE The other terminal may be defective or incompatible speed modem communication The machine resets the sequence because of an If th f tl lace the FCU abnormal handshake in the V e same error occurs trequently replace the FCU 34 control channel Defective remote terminal V 21 signal not stopped within m Replace the FCU Double registration of the SIP user name SIP user name registration error Capacity for user name registration in the SIP server is not sufficient 216 SIP server access error SIP authentication password error SMTP Send Error SMTP Connection Failed No Service by SMTP Service 421 Fax Error Codes Incorrect initial setting for t
298. tandard 4 MB Print 2 MB Scanner 2 MB Local area network Ethernet 1OObase Tx 1 Obase T IEEE1394 IP over 1394 IEEE802 11b wireless LAN Main scan 400 dpi 200 dpi Sub scan 400 dpi 200 dpi 100 dpi To use 400 dpi IFAX SWO1 Bit 4 must be set to 1 11 1 Appendix Specifications Transmission Time E mail File Format Data Rate Authentication Method 1 s through a LAN to the server Condition ITU T 1 test document Selerexe Letter MTF correction OFF TTI None Resolution 200 x 100 dpi Communication speed 10 Mbps Correspondent device E mail server Line conditions No terminal access Maximum message width is A4 LT To use BA and width IFAX SWOO Bit 1 B4 and or Bit 2 must 1 n be set to Single multi part MIME conversion Image TIFF F MH MR MMR Transmission SMTP TCP IP Reception POP3 SMTP IMAP4 TCP IP 100 Mbps 100base Tx 10 Mbps 10base T SMTP AUTH POP before SMTP A POP The machine must be set up as an e mail client before installation Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e mail clients or some features will not work e g Autorouting Specifications IP FAX Specifications Local Area Network Ethernet 1 Obase T 100base TX IEEE1394 IP over 1394 IEEE802 1 1b wireless LAN Network 8 x 3 85 lines mm 200 x 100dpi standard characters 8 x 7 7lines mm 200 x 200dpi detailed
299. ter 68055 DTMF tone off time 18 SP2 103 020 parameter 680559 fene level of DTMF signals N x 0 5 3 5 19 while dialing dBm See Note 5 294 NCU Parameters SP2 103 021 parameter 20 Tone attenuation value difference The setting must be less than 680553 between high frequency tone and low dBm x 0 5 5dBm and should not frequency tone in DTMF signals exceed the setting at 680552h above See Note 5 PSTN DTMF tone attenuation level after N x 0 5 3 5 SP2 103 022 parameter 680554 zum dialling dBm 21 See Note 5 ISDN i 680555 DTMF tone attenuation level after dBm x 0 5 See Note 5 dialling m Time between 68054Dh NCU This parameter takes effect 680557 parameter 14 and 68054Eh NCU 1 when country code is set parameter 15 to France The Gsrelay is closed for thi 680559 Grounding time ground start mode 20 ms vm tuu tede eue interval The OHDI relay i f 68055A Break time flash start mode 1 ms Mus du this interval 68055B Fl 68055C International dial access code Low 68055C 00 This time is waited for each pause input after the PSTN access code If this address contains FF H the pause 68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms 68054 F is used Do not set a number more than 7 in the UK S 68055B International dial access code High e For a code of 100 BCD 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Bit 7 O Bit 6 O Bi
300. ter digit pause pulse dial mode is the sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A 68054D and 68054E 301 302 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Dedicated Transmission Parameters e This section is used only for F SPF models 0068 0069 There are two sets of transmission parameters Fax and E mail Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated to it If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems store that terminal s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial and adjust the parameters allocated to that number The programming procedure will be explained first Then the eight bytes will be described Programming Procedure Set the bit O of System Bit Switch OO to 1 2 Enter Address Book Management mode User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools gt Address Book Management 3 Select the address book that you want to program 4 Press the Dest Key to enter the fax and e mail parameter settings 5 Forthe fax parameter select Fax Settings for the E mail parameter select E mail Settings Press the OK key and then press Start key Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green 7 The settings for the switch OO are now displayed Press the bit number that you wish to change 8 To scroll through the parameter switches either 9 Select the next switch press Next or Select t
301. ter switch 21 SWUSR_15 Bit Print results of sending reception notice request message Disabled print only when error occurs 1 Enabled Bit 1 Respond to e mail reception acknowledgment request Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 File format for forwarded folders O TIFF 1 PDF Bit 4 Transmit Journal by E mail Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 Network error display Displayed 1 Not displayed Bit 7 Transmit error mail notification Enabled 1 Disabled 6800E6 H User parameter switch 22 SWUSR_16 This switch is not printed on the user parameter list Bit O Dial tone detection PSTN 1 Disabled 1 Enabled Bits 1 to 3 Not used Bits 4 to 7 Setting the number of times of address input using numeric key O Off 1 to 15 On 6800E7 H User parameter switch 23 SWUSR_17 Not used 6800E8 H User parameter switch 24 SWUSR_18 Not used 6800E9 H User parameter switch 25 SWUSR_19 Bits O to 3 Not used Bit 4 RDS operation Not acceptable 1 Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03 This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user see system switch 02 Bits 5 to 7 Not used 6800EA H and 6800EB H User parameter switches 26 and 27 SWUSR 1A and 1B Not used 6800EC H User parameter switch 28 SWUSR_1C Ringing times setting in the TEL line priority mode OO to 99 BCD 6800ED H User parameter switch 29 SWUSR 1D
302. th letterhead pre printed pages 168 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 os os wae NEN ND NM NEN eem NEN NEN 1004 Print Summary Prints the service summary sheet An error log is printed in addition to the configuration page 1005 Display Version Displays the version of the controller firmware Sample Locked print O Link with Doc 1 On Enables and disables the document server When you select O the document server is enabled or disables in accordance with copy service mode SP5 967 When you select 1 the document server is enabled regardless of service mode SP5 967 169 170 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables SP Modes Related to Printer Controller The following SP modes are located in the copier SP mode Refer to section 5 1 of the main unit service manual Resets data for process control and all software counters and Memory All Clear returns all modes and adjustments to their defaults values Section Memory Clear in this chapter for details Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug amp Ug Plug amp Play This information is stored Detailed Display of pa pd Displays the controller self diagnostic result Self Diagnostics Scanner Program Mode Table Service Table Key Notation What it means Example 9 to 9 3 0 0 1 mm step The setting can be adjusted in the range 9 value
303. the Energy Saver mode automatically 1 The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode quickly because the 5V power supply is active even in the O Enabled 1 Disabled Energy Saver mode 249 250 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Interval for preventing the machine from entering Energy Saver mode if there is a pending transmission file Bit 5 0 Bit 4 O 1 min IF there is a file waiting for transmission the machine does 4 5 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 1 not go to Energy Saver mode during the selected period After transmitting the file if there is no file waiting for transmission the machine goes to the Energy Saver mode Bit 5 1 Bit 4 O 1 hour Bit 5 1 Bit 4 1 24 hours System Switch 16 SP No 1 101 023 Parallel Broadcasting 1 The machine sends messages simultaneously using all Disabled available ports during broadcasting 1 Enabled System Switch 17 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 18 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 19 SP No 1 101 026 FUNCTION COMMENTS CIENT IT NN 1 If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or Special Original mode letterhead which has a colored or printed background 7 O Disabled change this bit to 1 Original 1 and Original 2 can be selected addition to Text Text Photo and Photo modes Bit Switches System Switch 1A Not use
304. thin 1O seconds polygonal mirror motor and the BICU Or the polygon mirror motor remains out Defective cable between the BICU of the operating speed for 0 2 second and the polygon mirror motor after reaching the operating speed Defective BICU No laser writing signal F GATE error Defective BICU The polling module does not detect the DEM Loose connection on the fax controller laser writing signal F GATE asserting or the printer controller after the laser crosses 5 mm from the start point on the drum surface Defective fax controller or printer controller Charge roller current leak Defective charge roller The polling module detects a current leak Defective high volt ly board of the charge roller Loose connection of the PCU 26 The main scan synchronization detector does not detect the laser signal for 0 5 second The BICU detects the TD sensor outputting extraordinary voltage less than 0 2 V or more than 4 0 V 10 times consecutively The polling module detects a current leak of the development bias The ID sensor does not detect a correct pattern during developer initialization 2 214 001 SC Tables F SPF D068 D069 Toner bottle not installed Loose connection between the LD unit and the BICU Defective cable between the BICU and LD unit LD unit out of position Defective LD unit Defective BICU e Defective TD sensor Loose connection o
305. this section 3 Specify copy settings and press the key 4 To return to the SP mode press the 9 key Test Patterns Test Patterns Using VCU me Te e Using SP Mode F SPF D068 D069 Te omma ERCCIO ORNA NN 173 174 6 System Maintenance Reference Gradation Patches 1 128 Grades A4 Gradation Patches 2 128 Grades Trimming Area 4 EE Test Patterns Using SBU _ Meth REN Using SP Mode F SPF D068 D069 1 The PCI is available to the models with the controller box 2 The original image on the exposure glass is printed behind the test pattern Memory Clear GW Machine The GW machine the machine with the optional controller box stores the engine data in the NVRAM on the BICU and stores the other data in the NVRAM on the optional controller To distinguish between the engine data and the other data see SP5 80 1 003 through 015 This service program SP5 801 handles the controller data Any data that is not handled by SP5 801 is the engine data The data in the BICU NVRAM engine data is cleared by SP5 998 001 while the data in the controller controller data is cleared by SP5 801 xxx for exceptions see Exceptions as described below BICU SP5 998 001 Any data other than controller data GW SCS IMH MCS Copier application Fax application Printer application Controller
306. time Late Jam occurs because paper fails to arrive at the prescribed time EC NN a Displays the number of jams according to the paper size 0 to 9999 1 sheet step 7507 Dsply P Jam Hist 137 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Lastest 001 Displays the copy jam history the most recent 10 jams Sample Display ms MN DATE Mon Mar 15 11 44 50 2000 where CODE is the SP7504 number see above SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex TOTAL is the total jam error count SP7502 DATE is the date the jams occurred ws jm je ws je _ as m 7508 Dsply O Jam History 138 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Displays the original jam history the most recent 10 jams Sample Display MEAM DATE Mon Mar 15 11 44 50 2000 where 007 CODE is the SP7505 number see above SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex TOTAL is the total error count SP7503 Comer DATE is the date the jams occurred 7624 Part Replacement PCU 001 Selects the PM maintenance for PCU 7801 Memory Version PN 255 Displays he part number and version of all ROMs in machine 7803 001 Paper Displays the PM counter ia Paper 001 Resets the PM counter SP7 803 001 When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed 7807 Reset SC Jam 139 140 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Resets the SC paper original and tota
307. tinuous tone detection time Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges and number of cycles required for detection a setting of 4 cycles means that ON OFF ON or OFF ON OFF must be detected twice Tolerance 680533 Bit 1 O Bit O O 75 Bits 2 and must always be kept at Bit 1 O Bit O O 50 Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at O Bit 1 O Bit O 0 25 Bit 1 O Bit O O 12 5 Bits 7 6 5 4 number of cycles required for cadence detection 292 NCU Parameters International dial tone frequency upper limit high byte Hz BCD International dial tone frequency upper limit low byte International dial tone frequency lower limit high byte If both addresses contain FF Hz BCD tone detection is International dial tone frequency lower disabled limit low byte 680538 International dial tone detection time 680539 International dial tone reset time LOW If 680538 contains FF the 68053A International dial tone reset time HIGH machine pauses for the pause time 68053D 20 ms 680534 If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is 680535 disabled 680536 660537 International dial tone continuous tone 68053B 68053E time Belgium See Note 2 68053C International dial tone permissible drop time 68053D International dial wait interval LOW 68053E International dial wait interval HIGH Country dial tone upper frequency limit HIGH IF both add
308. tion unit Overwrite Security Unit or PostScript3 should be installed in Slot 1 If more than one application is to be used move the applications to the same SD card with SP5873 Slot 2 is used for options provided on SD cards and servicing The VM card must be installed in Slot 2 PostScript3 Installation ANCAUTION e Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure di 2 Installation Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below Accessories PostScript 3 Emulation SD Card D468 Installation Procedure d068i016 1 Install the PostScript3 SD card A into slot 1 2 Turn on the main power switch 3 Print out the configuration page User Tools Counter gt Printer Features gt List Test Print and then check that this device is detected 4 Attach the Adobe PostScript3 decal to the front cover of the machine Wireless LAN IEEE 802 1 1a g Installation A CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below Accessories 74 Controller Options Installation Procedure d068i017 1 Remove the interface cover A F x 2 Install the Wireless adaptor into I F slot B P x 2 Install the Wireless LAN card in the wireless adaptor Attach the antenna cop to the wireless LAN card Turn on the main
309. tive settings produce thinner lines This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 Ve 78 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Independent Dot Erase 4928 V Selects the dot erase level Higher settings provide greater erasure This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 92 1 Positive Negative 0 No 1 Yes 4929 Inverts white and black This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 Sharpness Edge 2 02 0 1 step 4930 Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to originals SP4 92 1 Sharpness Solid 2 02 0 1 step 4931 Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to originals SP4 92 1 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 4932 Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 92 1 4935 Color Image Adjust Main Scan MTF Level 003 1 step Adjust the MTF level for the main scan This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 None 1 Weak 2 Middle 3 Strong Main Scan MTF Strength 0 10 5 1 step Adjust the MTF strength for the main scan This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 OL 1 1732 2 1715 39 178 4 174 5 172 Turns on or off the MTF for the sub scan This setting is only activated for the specified mode with SP4 92 1 004 No 1 Yes Sub Scan MTF Strength 010 5 1 step Adjust the MTF strengt
310. ts The hour OO to 23 The 7th and 8th digits must be set to OO The digits are counted from the left Make sure that SP5 307 1 is set to 1 Access Control 5401 When installing the SDK application SAS VAS adjusts the following settings DFU 86 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 Selects the log out type for the extend authentication device Bit O Log out without an IC card Not allowed default 1 Allowed Extend Certification SDK1 Unique ID SDK1 Certification Method 210 SDK2 Unique ID SDK2 Certification Method SDK is the software development kit This data can be converted from SAS VAS when installed or uninstalled DFU SDK3 Certification Method Enables or disables the log out confirmation option Log out confirmation option Enable default 1 Disable Selects the automatic log out time Bit and 2 Automatic log out timer reduction 00 60 seconds default 01 10 seconds 10 20seconds 11 30 seconds 240 Detail Option 5404 User Code Clear 001 Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the machine Press Execute to clear 5411 LDAP Certification 87 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Easy Certification 004 Determines whether easy LDAP certification is done O to 1 1 1 1 On Off Password Null Not Permit 005 This SP is referenced only when SP541 1 4 is set to 1
311. uding the original table and platen cover Paper Tray Unit Power Consumption AA SEF 812 x 11 SEF 8 2 x 13 SEF Paper Sizes alo sc TA SEE Paper Weight 60 90 g m 16 24 lb Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m 21 Ib x 1 tray 14 Specifications Paper Feed System Feed roller and friction pad 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc from copier If optional tray heater is installed Power Source the copier also supplies Vac 120 Vac or 220 240 Maximum 15 W excluding optional tray heater 14 W excluding optional tray heater Size W x Dx HJ 430 x A14 x 140 16 9 x 16 3 x 5 5 Two can be installed 15 1 Appendix Specifications Supported Paper Sizes Original Paper Sizes The copier and ARDF do not detect original paper sizes The following table lists the paper sizes that the ARDF can transport A3 SEF 297 x A20 mm BA SEF 257 x 364 mm A4 SEF 210x297 mm A4 LEF 297 x210 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm 5 SEF 148 210 mm AS LEF 210x 148 mm B SEF 128 x 182 mm B LEF 182 x 128 mm SEF 105 x 148 mm 8K SEF 267 x 390 mm T K SEF 195 x 267 mm 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm DLT SEF 11 0 x 17 0 LG SEF 8 5 x 14 0 ET SEF 8 5 x 11 0 LT LEF 11 0 x 8 5 16 Supported Paper Sizes Width 139 216 mm Custom Length 139 356 mm Symbol meanings X X gt lt X Can use Cannot use 1 Can be used when the ARDF is insta
312. unit 485 x 454 x 511 mm 18 4 x 17 7 x 20 09 Off Mode Noise Emission F SPF 0068 0069 29 kg 66 lb or less Weight Basic 0067 22 kg 48 5 Ib or less Basic with ARDF DO72 27 kg 59 4 Ib or less Resolution 600 dpi Specifications Copying Speed in Multicopy Memory Copy 17cpm A4 8 5 x 11 100 Mode copies minute DF 1 to 1 1 F SPF 0068 0069 30 seconds or less at 20 C 68 F Warm up Time Basic 0067 0072 10 seconds or less at 20 C 68 C 7 5 seconds or less Note Measurement conditions From the ready state with the polygonal mirror motor spinning First Copy Time e A4 LT copying From copier s paper tray e 100 size Copy Number Input Numeric keypad 1 to 99 increment decrement Default 1 minute Auto Off Timer Range to 240 minutes Default 1 minute Energy Saver Timer Rage to 240 minutes Paper Tray 250 sheets Copy Paper Capacity Optional Paper Tray Unit 500 sheets x 1 Bypass Tray 100 sheets Copy Tray Capacity 250 sheets Toner Replenishment Cartridge replacement 230 g cartridge Toner Yield 7k copies toner bottle A4 6 full black Auto reverse document feeder Optional Equipment Paper tray unit Anti condensation heater for paper tray unit 1 Appendix Specifications Printer 600 dpi PCL 6 PCL5e PS3 RPCS Resolution 300 dpi PCL5e PS3 600 dpi RPCS XPS Printing speed 17 cpm A4 8 1
313. used Switch 04 Not used do not change the settings Switch O5 Not used do not change the settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Dedicated Transmission Parameters Switch O8 Not used do not change the settings Switch O9 Not used do not change the settings E mail Parameters The initial settings of the following e mail parameters are all O all parameters disabled Switch 00 MH Compression mode for e mail attachments Switches MH compression on and off for files attached to e 0 Off mails for sending 1 On MR Compression mode for e mail attachments Switches MR compression on and off for files attached to e 0 Off mails for sending 1 On MMR Compression mode for e mail attachments Switches MMR compression on and off for files attached to 0 Off e mails for sending 1 On Designates the bits to reference for The selection default references the settings for Bits OO 7 method of e mail attachments p 02 above The 1 selection ignores the selections of Bits O Registered Bit O to 6 OO 01 02 1 No registration 307 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 Original width of e mail attachment A4 0 Off On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A4 Original width of e mail attachment BA Off On Sets the original width of the e m
314. usts the magnification Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment The specification is 100 1 0 SPA XXX Scanner 4008 Sub Scan Magnification Scanner 0 9 to 0 9 0 0 0 1 step Adjusts the sub scan magnification V Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4009 Main Scan Magnification Scanner 0 9 to 0 9 0 0 0 1 step Adjusts the main scan magnification ii Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4010 Leading Edge Scan Registration 75 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the leading edge registration Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4011 Side to side Scan Regist 2 0 to 2 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 179 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Adjusts the side to side registration for scanning in platen mode i8 Adjusting Copy Image Area in the section Replacement and Adjustment 4012 Scan Erase Margin O to 9 0 1 0 0 1 mm step 4012 1 Leading edge 4012 2 Trailing edge Adjusts the scanning margin Generally the scanning margin should be as little as possible To adjust the image 4012 3 Left Side area use SP2 101 4012 4 Right Side me 4013 1 Conducts the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on 4015 5 White Plate Scan 4015 1 Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate The base value is 17 8 mm from the scanner home
315. ve Maintenance LN Maintenance Tables See Appendices for the following information 89 3 Preventive Maintenance How to Clear the PM Counter Reset the PM counter after your maintenance work A 262 901 1 Activate the SP mode 2 Select SP7 804 001 3 Pressthe EXECUTE key A The message Completed is displayed when the program ends normally An error message is displayed if the program ends abnormally 4 Press the Escape key B to end the program 90 4 Replacement and Adjustment Precautions General A CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before starting replacement Before turning off the main power switch check that no mechanical component is operating Mechanical components may stop out of their home positions if you turn off the main power switch while they are operating The component may be damaged if you try to remove it when it is not in the home position Lithium Batteries A CAUTION Incorrect replacement of lithium battery s on the controller or on the fax unit poses risk of explosion Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Halogen free Cable A CAUTION e Use extreme caution while handling cables To comply with local regulations halogen free cables are used in this machine Halogen free cables
316. ve the NVRAM D from the board Install the NVRAM to the new board 6 After replacing the NVRAM copy the saved data to the NVRAM e From an SD card to the Vi NVRAM Data Upload Download SP5 824 825 in Controller Board F SPF models D068 D069 Preparation Before replacing the controller board be sure to print out SMC or save the NVRAM data Saving from the Controller to an SD card I NVRAM Data Upload Download SP5 824 825 in the System Service Mode of the appendices of the this manual Procedure 1 Rear cover i Rear Cover 2 Scanner upper left cover 4 Operation Panel and Upper Covers 3 FCU i FCU 127 128 4 Replacement and Adjustment DU Ex d068r020 Remove the printer scanner SD card Remove I F cover A or I F options if they have been installed P x 2 Remove the bracket B F x 1 Remove the USB cap C Hud a os 3 at ii liil Lii 3 pu LL mi P Tr nz A i L1 E d 1 H LI Item zx pud js Luar i lege a iA T B 1 n baak 0 a 8 Remove the relay connector Remove the ground plate B F x H Remove the controller board with the rails C P x 6 BICU and Controller Board d068r021 129 4 Replacement and Adjustment A 2 OE S
317. ve thermistor Incorrect installation of the thermistor Defective power supply unit Zero cross signal malfunction The zero cross signal is not detected within five seconds after the main power switch is turned on Or the zero cross signal is not e detected within one second after operation begins The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times The paper jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly e This SC is activated only when Defective power supply unit Defective BICU Paper jam in the fusing unit Consecutive fusing jam 559 A SP1159 001 is set to 1 default O 99 3 Appendix Service Call Conditions oose connection of the exhaust fan The exhaust fan motor is locked for five motor seconds Overload An error occurs during communication with Defective accounting device the MF accounting device loose connection Exhaust fan motor error An error occurs in the backup RAM for the MF accounting device An error occurs in the battery of the MF accounting device e BICU does not get a signal from the printer board for 1 5 seconds or more BICU gets a break signal after Defective communication between completing the communication with BICU and printer board the printer board and does not get a signal from the printer board for 10 seconds or more e BICU does not get a signal from the scanner board for 1 5 seconds or more BICU g
318. w byte PABX dial tone frequency lower limit 680519 high byte If both addresses contain FF Hz BCD H tone detection is 68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit dabled low byte machine pauses for the pause time 680520 680521 If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is 680523 PABX ringback tone off detection time disabled PABX detection time for silent period 680524 20 after ringback tone detected LOW IF both addresses contain FF H tone detection is PABX detection time for silent period disabled 680525 20 i after ringback tone detected HIGH 68051B PABX dial tone detection time 68051C PABX dial tone reset time LOW If 68051B contains FF the 20 ms 291 7 Appendix Fax Service Program Only For D068 D069 PABX busy tone frequency upper limit 680526 high byte If both addresses contain FF Hz BCD H tone detection is 680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper limit disabled low byte PABX busy tone frequency lower limit 680528 high byte IF both addresses contain FF Hz BCD tone detection is 680529 PABX busy tone frequency lower limit disabled low byte 68052A Busy tone ON time range 1 68052B Busy tone OFF time range 1 i 20 ms 68052C Busy tone ON time range 2 68052D Busy tone OFF time range 2 68052 Busy tone ON time range 3 68052F Busy tone OFF time range 3 680530 Busy tone ON time range 4 20 ms 680531 Busy tone OFF time range 4 680532 Busy tone con
319. xSend BW 105 FaxSend BW Input Check SP5 803 Conducting Input Check 1 Select SP5 803 Select the number see the table below corresponding to the component Select Execute The copy mode is activated The sign 01H or OOH is displayed see the table below 19 19 161 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Input Check Table _ _ 162 System Service Mode F SPF D068 D069 044 DF Reverse S Paper detected Not detected 045 Platen Cover S Closed O50 Fan Motor Lock High speed High speed Low speed or stop 052 Front Cover SW Closed 053 HP Sensor Detected Not detected 055 BK UpperCover SW Closed 056 BK LowerCover SW Open Closed Available Paper Feed Unit op 30 l tray paper feed unit Output Check SP5 804 Conducting Output Check A CAUTION To prevent mechanical or electrical damage do not keep an electrical component on for a long time 1 Select SP5 804 Select the number see the table below corresponding to the component Select ON om To stop the operation select OFF Output Check Table 001 Main M Fwd 163 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables C When checking Fan Motor High 005 or Fan Motor Low 006 note the following These motors may not respond when the fusing temperature is high Selecting ON checks that one of th
320. y limitation display is limited and redial is disabled 0 OFF 1 ON Operation selection without PIN code registered When is selected without PIN code registration transmission is interrupted and an alert message shows on the LCD O Transmission interrupted 1 No interrupted transmission System Switch 1E SP No 1 101 031 O When this switch is on and the journal history becomes full the next report prints IF the journal history is not deleted the next transmission cannot be received This prevents overwriting communication records before the machine can Communication after the Journal print them data storage area has become full 1 i the buffer memory of the communication records for 0 Impossible the Journal is full fax communications are still possible But 1 Possible the machine will overwrite the oldest communication records Note This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report e g no paper O IF the SAF b full duri ing th Action when the SAF memory has nd QE Ms MS successfully scanned pages are transmitted become full during scanning 1 If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning the file The current page is erased is erased and no pages are transmitted 1 The entire file is erased This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory transmission 252 Bit Switches RTI CSI display pri
321. yo NA 300 New York EU 60 Paris CH 480 Peking TW 480 Taipei AS 480 Hong Kong Time Difference 1440 to 1440 Area 1 min step or 1 EU ASIA 1 step O Disabled ON OFF 1 Enabled NA and EUR 1 ASIA O 001 Enables or disables the summer time mode Make sure that both SP5 307 3 and 4 are correctly set Otherwise this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to 1 85 5 Appendix SP Mode Tables Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode There are 8 digits in this SP For months 1 to 9 the cannot be input in the first digit so the eight digit setting for 2 or 3 becomes a seven digit setting 1st and 2nd digits The month 1 to 12 3rd digit The week of the month 1 to 5 Ath digit The day of the week O to 6 Sunday to Saturday 5th and 6th digits The hour OO to 23 7th digit The length of the advanced time O to 9 1 hour step 8th digit The length of the advanced time O to 5 10 minutes step For example 3500010 EU default The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0 00 on the 5th Sunday in March The digits are counted from the left Make sure that SP5 307 1 is set to 1 Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode There are 8 digits in this SP 1st and 2nd digits The month 1 to 12 3rd digit The week of the month O to 5 Ath digit The day of the week to 6 Sunday to Saturday 5th and th digi

Service Manual: Stella-C4, S-C4 (D067/D068/D069/D072), Aficio

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents